ZyXEL Communications VMG1312B10A Dual WAN VDSL2 Gateway with 802.11n; Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB User Manual
ZyXEL Communications Corporation Dual WAN VDSL2 Gateway with 802.11n; Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB Users Manual
Users Manual
www.zyxel.com
www.zyxel.com
VMG1312-B10A
Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB
Copyright © 2011
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
Firmware Version 1.00
Edition 1, 12/2011
Default Login Details
IP Address http://192.168.1.1
User Name admin
Password 1234
About This User's Guide
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 3
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Device using the web configurator.
You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and topology.
Related Documentation
•Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains
information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access.
•Support Disc
Refer to the included CD for support documents.
•ZyXEL Web Site
Please refer to www.zyxel.com for additional support documentation and product certifications.
Disclaimer
Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems,
operating system versions, or if you installed updated firmware/software for your device. Every
effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate.
Document Conventions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
4
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may
need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The VMG1312-B10A may be referred to as the “Device”, the “system” or the “product” in this
User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER] means the
“enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key. “Select”
or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example,
Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel,
then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value. For example, “k”
for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so
on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.
Document Conventions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 5
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The Device icon is not an exact
representation of your device.
Device Computer Notebook computer
Server Firewall Telephone
Router Switch
Safety Warnings
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
6
Safety Warnings
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock
from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage
points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please
contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or
230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can
walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
• Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
• Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included
antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste
Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be
mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately.
Contents Overview
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 7
Contents Overview
User’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................19
Introducing the Device ............................................................................................................................21
The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................27
Quick Start ...............................................................................................................................................35
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................37
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................79
Network Map and Status Screens ...........................................................................................................81
Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................85
Wireless ................................................................................................................................................109
Home Networking ..................................................................................................................................141
Routing ..................................................................................................................................................163
Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................169
Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................187
Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................203
Interface Group .....................................................................................................................................207
USB Service ..........................................................................................................................................213
Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................219
MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................................229
Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................231
Scheduler Rules ....................................................................................................................................235
Certificates ............................................................................................................................................237
Log .......................................................................................................................................................245
Traffic Status ........................................................................................................................................249
ARP Table .............................................................................................................................................253
Routing Table ........................................................................................................................................255
IGMP Status .........................................................................................................................................257
xDSL Statistics ......................................................................................................................................259
User Account .........................................................................................................................................263
Remote Management ............................................................................................................................265
TR-069 Client ........................................................................................................................................267
TR-064 ..................................................................................................................................................269
Time Settings ........................................................................................................................................271
E-mail Notification .................................................................................................................................275
Logs Setting .........................................................................................................................................277
Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................281
Configuration .........................................................................................................................................283
Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................286
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 9
Table of Contents
About This User's Guide......................................................................................................................3
Document Conventions .......................................................................................................................4
Safety Warnings....................................................................................................................................6
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................7
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................9
Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 19
Chapter 1
Introducing the Device.......................................................................................................................21
1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................21
1.2 Ways to Manage the Device .............................................................................................................21
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device ..............................................................................................21
1.4 Applications for the Device ...............................................................................................................22
1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................22
1.4.2 Device’s USB Support .............................................................................................................23
1.5 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................24
1.6 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................25
1.7 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................25
1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button .................................................................................................26
Chapter 2
The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................27
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................27
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................27
2.2 Web Configurator Layout ..................................................................................................................29
2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................29
2.2.2 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................30
2.2.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................30
Chapter 3
Quick Start...........................................................................................................................................35
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................35
3.2 Quick Start Setup ..............................................................................................................................35
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
10
Chapter 4
Tutorials...............................................................................................................................................37
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................37
4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection ..........................................................................................37
4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................40
4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................40
4.3.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................42
4.3.3 Without WPS ...........................................................................................................................45
4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups ................................................................................................46
4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network .................................................................49
4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ........................................................................................52
4.7 Access the Device Using DDNS .......................................................................................................55
4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ..................................................................55
4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Device ..........................................................................................56
4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ........................................................................................................56
4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter ..................................................................................................57
4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ....................................................................................58
4.10 Using the Media Server Feature ....................................................................................................59
4.10.1 Configuring the Device ..........................................................................................................59
4.10.2 Using Windows Media Player ................................................................................................59
4.10.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter ...............................................................................................62
4.11 Using the Print Server Feature ........................................................................................................64
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 79
Chapter 5
Network Map and Status Screens .....................................................................................................81
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................81
5.2 The Network Map Screen .................................................................................................................81
5.3 The Status Screen .............................................................................................................................82
Chapter 6
Broadband...........................................................................................................................................85
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................85
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................85
6.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................86
6.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................88
6.2 The Broadband Screen .....................................................................................................................88
6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ...................................................................................................89
6.3 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................96
6.4 The Advanced Screen .....................................................................................................................100
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 11
6.5 The 8021x Screen ...........................................................................................................................101
6.5.1 Edit 802.1x Settings ...............................................................................................................102
6.6 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................102
Chapter 7
Wireless.............................................................................................................................................109
7.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................109
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................109
7.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................................ 110
7.2 The General Screen .......................................................................................................................110
7.2.1 No Security ............................................................................................................................112
7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ........................................................................................................113
7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) .................................................................................................. 115
7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication ........................................................................................................... 116
7.3 The More AP Screen ....................................................................................................................... 117
7.3.1 Edit More AP ........................................................................................................................ 118
7.4 MAC Authentication ........................................................................................................................ 119
7.5 The WPS Screen ............................................................................................................................120
7.6 The WMM Screen ...........................................................................................................................122
7.7 The WDS Screen ............................................................................................................................123
7.7.1 WDS Scan .............................................................................................................................124
7.8 The Others Screen ..........................................................................................................................125
7.9 The Channel Status Screen ............................................................................................................127
7.10 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................127
7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview .................................................................................................127
7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms ...................................................................................................129
7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview .................................................................................................129
7.10.4 Signal Problems ..................................................................................................................131
7.10.5 BSS .....................................................................................................................................132
7.10.6 MBSSID ...............................................................................................................................132
7.10.7 Preamble Type ....................................................................................................................133
7.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ...................................................................................133
7.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ...............................................................................................133
Chapter 8
Home Networking .............................................................................................................................141
8.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................141
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................141
8.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................142
8.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................143
8.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................................143
8.3 The Static DHCP Screen .................................................................................................................146
8.4 The UPnP Screen ...........................................................................................................................148
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
12
8.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................................149
8.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................................151
8.7 The Additional Subnet Screen ........................................................................................................157
8.8 The STB Vendor ID Screen .............................................................................................................158
8.9 The LAN VLAN Screen ...................................................................................................................159
8.10 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................159
8.10.1 LANs, WANs and the Device ...............................................................................................160
8.10.2 DHCP Setup ........................................................................................................................160
8.10.3 DNS Server Addresses .......................................................................................................160
8.10.4 LAN TCP/IP .........................................................................................................................161
Chapter 9
Routing ..............................................................................................................................................163
9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................163
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................163
9.2 The Routing Screen ........................................................................................................................164
9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route .............................................................................................................165
9.3 The Policy Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................165
9.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding ...................................................................................................167
Chapter 10
Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................169
10.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................169
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................169
10.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................170
10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ........................................................................................171
10.4 The Queue Setup Screen .............................................................................................................172
10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue .........................................................................................................174
10.5 The Class Setup Screen ...............................................................................................................174
10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ............................................................................................................176
10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen .....................................................................................................179
10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer .......................................................................................................180
10.7 The QoS Monitor Screen .............................................................................................................181
10.8 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................182
Chapter 11
Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................187
11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................187
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................187
11.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................187
11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................188
11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding ....................................................................................................190
11.3 The Applications Screen ...............................................................................................................191
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 13
11.3.1 Add New Application ............................................................................................................192
11.4 The Port Triggering Screen ...........................................................................................................192
11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule .............................................................................................194
11.5 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................195
11.6 The ALG Screen ............................................................................................................................196
11.7 The Address Mapping Screen .......................................................................................................196
11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule ..........................................................................................197
11.8 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................198
11.8.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................198
11.8.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................199
11.8.3 How NAT Works ...................................................................................................................200
11.8.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................201
Chapter 12
Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................203
12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................203
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................203
12.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................204
12.2 The DNS Entry Screen ..................................................................................................................204
12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry .............................................................................................................205
12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................205
Chapter 13
Interface Group.................................................................................................................................207
13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................207
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................207
13.2 The Interface Group Screen ..........................................................................................................207
13.2.1 Interface Group Configuration .............................................................................................208
13.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria .................................................................................................210
Chapter 14
USB Service ......................................................................................................................................213
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................213
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................213
14.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................213
14.2 The File Sharing Screen ...............................................................................................................214
14.2.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................215
14.3 The Media Server Screen .............................................................................................................216
14.4 The Printer Server Screen ............................................................................................................217
14.4.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................217
Chapter 15
Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................219
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
14
15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................219
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................219
15.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................220
15.2 The Firewall Screen ......................................................................................................................221
15.3 The Service Screen ......................................................................................................................221
15.3.1 Add/Edit a Service ..............................................................................................................222
15.4 The Access Control Screen ..........................................................................................................223
15.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ........................................................................................................225
15.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................226
Chapter 16
MAC Filter..........................................................................................................................................229
16.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................229
16.2 The MAC Filter Screen ..................................................................................................................229
Chapter 17
Parental Control................................................................................................................................231
17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................231
17.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................231
17.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Rule .........................................................................................232
Chapter 18
Scheduler Rules................................................................................................................................235
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................235
18.2 The Scheduler Rules Screen ........................................................................................................235
18.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ............................................................................................................236
Chapter 19
Certificates ........................................................................................................................................237
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................237
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................237
19.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................237
19.3 The Local Certificates Screen .......................................................................................................238
19.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................................239
19.3.2 Load Signed Certificate ......................................................................................................240
19.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................241
19.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................................242
19.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ..............................................................................................243
Chapter 20
Log ....................................................................................................................................................245
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................245
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................245
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 15
20.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................245
20.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................246
20.3 The Security Log Screen ...............................................................................................................247
Chapter 21
Traffic Status ....................................................................................................................................249
21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................249
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................249
21.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................249
21.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................251
Chapter 22
ARP Table..........................................................................................................................................253
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................253
22.1.1 How ARP Works ..................................................................................................................253
22.2 ARP Table Screen .........................................................................................................................253
Chapter 23
Routing Table ....................................................................................................................................255
23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................255
23.2 The Routing Table Screen .............................................................................................................255
Chapter 24
IGMP Status ......................................................................................................................................257
24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................257
24.2 The IGMP Group Status Screen ...................................................................................................257
Chapter 25
xDSL Statistics..................................................................................................................................259
25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen ...........................................................................................................259
Chapter 26
User Account ....................................................................................................................................263
26.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................263
26.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................263
Chapter 27
Remote Management........................................................................................................................265
27.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................265
27.2 The Remote MGMT Screen ..........................................................................................................265
Chapter 28
TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................267
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
16
28.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................267
28.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................267
Chapter 29
TR-064................................................................................................................................................269
29.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................269
29.2 The TR-064 Screen .......................................................................................................................269
Chapter 30
Time Settings ....................................................................................................................................271
30.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................271
30.2 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................271
Chapter 31
E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................................275
31.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................275
31.2 The Email Notification Screen .......................................................................................................275
31.2.1 Email Notification Edit ........................................................................................................276
Chapter 32
Logs Setting .....................................................................................................................................277
32.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................277
32.2 The Log Settings Screen ...............................................................................................................277
32.2.1 Example E-mail Log ............................................................................................................278
Chapter 33
Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................281
33.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................281
33.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................281
Chapter 34
Configuration ....................................................................................................................................283
34.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................283
34.2 The Configuration Screen .............................................................................................................283
34.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................285
Chapter 35
Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................286
35.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................286
35.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................286
35.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................286
35.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ...................................................................................................287
35.4 802.1ag .........................................................................................................................................288
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 17
35.5 OAM Ping Test ..............................................................................................................................289
Chapter 36
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................291
36.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................291
36.2 Device Access and Login ..............................................................................................................292
36.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................294
36.4 Wireless Internet Access ...............................................................................................................295
36.5 USB Device Connection ................................................................................................................296
36.6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................................296
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address.......................................................................299
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting.......................................................................................321
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions .................................................329
Appendix D Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................339
Appendix E IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................353
Appendix F Services........................................................................................................................361
Appendix G Legal Information .........................................................................................................365
Index ..................................................................................................................................................369
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
18
19
PART I
User’s Guide
20
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 21
CHAPTER 1
Introducing the Device
1.1 Overview
The VMG1312-B10A is a wireless VDSL router. It has a DSL port for super-fast Internet access over
analog (POTS) telephone lines. The Device supports both Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) and
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in
case VDSL is not available.
Only use firmware for your Device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your Device.
The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive.
See Chapter 37 on page 299 for a full list of features.
1.2 Ways to Manage the Device
Use any of the following methods to manage the Device.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a
(supported) web browser.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device
Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more
effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings. If you
backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Device. You
could simply restore your last configuration.
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
22
1.4 Applications for the Device
Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited.
1.4.1 Internet Access
Your Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM
jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or
VDSL. The Device cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode at the same time.
Note: The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN (layer-2) interfaces that you
configure in the Device. Refer to Section 6.2 on page 88 for the Network Setting
> Broadband screen.
Computers can connect to the Device’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).
Figure 1 Device’s Internet Access Application
You can also configure IP filtering on the Device for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on,
all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from
your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you
can safely browse the Internet and download files.
ADSL / VDSL
WLAN
PPPoE
IPoE
Bridging
WAN
ADSL
IPoA
WAN
LAN
LAN
WLAN
A
A
PPPoA
IPoE
PPPoE
Bridging
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 23
1.4.2 Device’s USB Support
The USB port of the Device is used for file-sharing.
File Sharing
Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can
connect one USB hard drive to the Device at a time. Use FTP to access the files on the USB device.
Figure 2 USB File Sharing Application
Media Server
You can also use the Device as a media server. This lets anyone on your network play video, music,
and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the Device’s USB port (without having to copy them
to another computer).
Figure 3 USB Media Server Application
B
A
B
A
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
24
1.5 LEDs (Lights)
The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs.
Figure 4 LEDs on the Device
None of the LEDs are on if the Device is not receiving power.
Table 1 LED Descriptions
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
POWER Green On The Device is receiving power and ready for use.
Blinking The Device is self-testing.
Red On The Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device
malfunction.
Off The Device is not receiving power.
Blinking Firmware upgrade is in progress.
ETHERNET
1-4 Green On The Device has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device
on the Local Area Network (LAN).
Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN at 100 Mbps.
Off The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN.
WLAN/WPS Green On The wireless network is activated.
Blinking The Device is communicating with other wireless clients.
Orange Blinking The Device is setting up a WPS connection.
Off The wireless network is not activated.
DSL Green On The ADSL line is up.
Blinking The Device is initializing the ADSL line.
Orange On The VDSL line is up.
Blinking The Device is initializing the VDSL line.
Off The DSL line is down.
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 25
1.6 The RESET Button
If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET
button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you
will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.
1Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
2To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or
until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink,
the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.
1.7 Wireless Access
The Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or PDAs
and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet
cables.
INTERNET Green On The Device has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP
server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the
DSL connection is up.
Blinking The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic.
Off There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode.
Red On The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible
causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE
authentication failed.
USB Green On The Device recognizes a USB connection.
Blinking The Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected
to it.
Off The Device does not detect a USB connection.
Table 1 LED Descriptions (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
26
You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS
button.
Figure 5 Wireless Access Example
1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button
If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button at the back of the Device for
one second. Once the WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active.
You can also use the WLAN/WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between
the Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time.
To activate WPS:
1Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking.
2Press the WLAN/WPS button for five seconds and release it.
3Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the Device. The WLAN/WPS
LED flashes orange while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device.
4Once the connection is successfully made, the WLAN/WPS LED shines green.
To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the Device for one to
five seconds. The WLAN/WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 27
CHAPTER 2
The Web Configurator
2.1 Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3
and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by
768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
See Appendix C on page 329 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet
Explorer.
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
1Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
2Launch your web browser. If the Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go
to http://192.168.1.1.
3A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the Device,
type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login. If
advanced account security is enabled (see Section 26.2 on page 263) the number of dots that
appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password
field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password, enter your
password and click Login.
Figure 6 Password Screen
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
28
4The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly
recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and
click Apply; alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the
password now.
Figure 7 Change Password Screen
5The Quick Start Wizard screen appears. You can configure the Device’s time zone, basic Internet
access, and wireless settings. See Chapter 3 on page 35 for more information.
6After you finished or closed the Quick Start Wizard screen, the Network Map page appears.
Figure 8 Network Map
7Click Status to display the Status screen, where you can view the Device’s interface and system
information.
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 29
2.2 Web Configurator Layout
Figure 9 Screen Layout
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
•A - title bar
•B - main window
•C - navigation panel
2.2.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner.
The icons provide the following functions.
B
C
A
Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Quick Start: Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the Device’s time zone
Internet access, and wireless settings.
Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
30
2.2.2 Main Window
The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this
document.
After you click Status on the Connection Status page, the Status screen is displayed. See
Chapter 5 on page 82 for more information about the Status screen.
If you click LAN Device on the System Info screen, the Connection Status screen appears. See
Chapter 4 on page 59 for more information about the Connection Status screen.
If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the
connection status of the Device’s ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are
gray.
Figure 10 Virtual Device
2.2.3 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features. The
following tables describe each menu item.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Connection Status This screen shows the network status of the Device and computers/
devices connected to it.
Network Setting
Broadband Broadband Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP
address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add
new WAN connections.
3G Backup Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection.
Advanced Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M, and
DSL PhyR functions.
8021x Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the
Device.
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 31
Wireless General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN
authentication/security settings.
More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device.
MAC
Authentication Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices
of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the Device.
WPS Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup) settings.
WMM Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM).
WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to
other access points.
Others Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings.
Channel Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the
results.
Home
Networking LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced
properties.
Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC
addresses.
UPnP Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off.
Additional
Subnet Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP.
STB Vendor ID Use this screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP
entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP
addresses.
5th Ethernet
Port Use this screen to configure the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port.
Routing Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Device.
Policy
Forwarding Use this screen to configure policy routing on the Device.
QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also
configure the QoS rules and actions.
Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues.
Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier.
Policer Setup Use these screens to configure QoS policers.
Monitor Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics.
NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside
world.
Applications Use this screen to configure servers behind the Device.
Port Triggering Use this screen to change your Device’s port triggering settings.
DMZ Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets
from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen.
ALG Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG.
Address Mapping Use this screen to change your Device’s address mapping settings.
DNS DNS Entry Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes.
Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP
address.
Interface
Group Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
32
USB Device File Sharing Use this screen to enable file sharing via the Device.
Media Server Use this screen to use the Device as a media server.
Printer Server Use this screen to enable the print server on the Device and get the
model name of the associated printer.
Security Settings
Firewall General Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall.
Service Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules.
Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network
services.
DoS Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS)
attacks.
MAC Filter Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC
addresses to the Device.
Parental
Control Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL.
Scheduler Rule Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured
restriction (such as parental control) is enforced.
Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage
certificates and certification requests.
Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs.
System Monitor
Log System Log Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the
Device. You can export or e-mail the logs.
Security Log Use this screen to view the login record of the Device. You can export
or e-mail the logs.
Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through
the WAN port of the Device.
LAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through
the LAN ports of the Device.
ARP Table Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC
address of each DHCP connection.
IGMP Group
Status Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the Device.
xDSL Statistics Use this screen to view the Device’s xDSL traffic statistics.
Maintenance
User Account Use this screen to change user password on the Device.
Remote MGMT Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network
services.
TR-069 Client Use this screen to configure the Device to be managed by an Auto
Configuration Server (ACS).
TR-064 Client Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Time Use this screen to change your Device’s time and date.
Email
Notification Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender
addresses on the Device.
Log Setting Use this screen to change your Device’s log settings.
Firmware
Upgrade Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 33
Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Reboot Use this screen to reboot the Device without turning the power off.
Diagnostic Ping &
Traceroute &
Nslookup
Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can
use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems.
802.1ag Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management)
MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association),
perform connectivity tests and view test reports.
OAM Ping Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with
the DSL connection.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
34
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 35
CHAPTER 3
Quick Start
3.1 Overview
Use the Quick Start screens to configure the Device’s time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless
settings.
Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on page 79) for background
information on the features in this chapter.
3.2 Quick Start Setup
1The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login. Or you can click the Click Start icon in
the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Select the time zone of
the Device’s location and click Next.
Figure 11 Time Zone
Chapter 3 Quick Start
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
36
2Enter your Internet connection information in this screen. The screen and fields to enter may vary
depending on your current connection type. Click Next. Click Next.
Figure 12 Internet Connection
3Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure
your wireless clients to connect to the Device. Click Save.
Figure 13 Internet Connection
4Your Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 37
CHAPTER 4
Tutorials
4.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to use the Device’s various features.
•Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection, see page 37
•Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 40
•Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups, see page 46
•Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 49
•Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup, see page 52
•Access the Device Using DDNS, see page 55
•Configuring the MAC Address Filter, see page 57
•Access Your Shared Files From a Computer, see page 58
•Using the Media Server Feature, see page 59
•Using the Print Server Feature, see page 64
4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection
This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the Web Configurator.
If you connect to the Internet through an ADSL connection, use the information from your Internet
Service Provider (ISP) to configure the Device. Be sure to contact your service provider for any
information you need to configure the Broadband screens.
1Click Network Setting > Broadband to open the following screen. Click Add New WAN
Interface.
2In this example, the DSL connection has the following information.
General
Name MyDSLConnection
Type ADSL
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
38
3Select the Active check box. Enter the General and ATM PVC Configuration settings as provided
above.
Set the Type to ADSL over ATM.
Choose the Encapsulation specified by your DSL service provider. For this example, the service
provider requires a username and password to establish Internet connection. Therefore, select
PPPoE as the WAN encapsulation type.
Set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode to IPv4 Only.
4Enter the account information provided to you by your DSL service provider.
5Configure this rule as your default Internet connection by selecting the Apply as Default Gateway
check box. Then select DNS as Static and enter the DNS server addresses provided to you, such as
192.168.5.2 (DNS server1)/192.168.5.1 (DNS server2).
6Leave the rest of the fields to the default settings.
Connection Mode Routing
Encapsulation PPPoE
IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv4
ATM PVC Configuration
VPI/VCI 36/48
Encapsulation Mode LLC/SNAP-Bridging
Service Category UBR without PCR
Account Information
PPP User Name 1234@DSL-Ex.com
PPP Password ABCDEF!
PPPoE Service Name MyDSL
Static IP Address 192.168.1.32
Others PPPoE Passthrough: Disabled
NAT: Enabled
IGMP Multicast Proxy: Enabled
Apply as Default Gateway: Enabled
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 39
7Click Apply to save your settings.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
40
8You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows.
Try to connect to a website to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection. Be sure to
contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens.
4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network
Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet.
In this wireless network, the Device serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the
wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP.
Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the Device. Then he can set up a wireless
network using WPS (Section 4.3.2 on page 42) or manual configuration (Section 4.3.3 on page 45).
4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings
This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network.
SSID Example
Security Mode WPA-PSK
Pre-Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork
802.11 Mode 802.11b/g/n Mixed
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 41
1Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level and WPA-PSK as the security mode. Configure the screen using the provided
parameters (see page 40). Click Apply.
2Go to the Wireless > Others screen and select 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field.
Click Apply.
Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and
the Device (see Section 4.3.2 on page 42). He can also use the notebook’s wireless client to search
for the Device (see Section 4.3.3 on page 45).
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
42
4.3.2 Using WPS
This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the Device as the AP
and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook.
Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter
or PCMCIA card).
There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
•Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two
methods.
•PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the Device. A wireless
client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the
Device.
Push Button Configuration (PBC)
1Make sure that your Device is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless
signal.
2Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook.
3In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button
(Start or WPS button).
4Push and hold the WPS button located on the Device’s front panel for more than 5 seconds.
Alternatively, you may log into Device’s web configurator and go to the Network Setting >
Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply. Then click the Connect button.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 43
Note: Your Device has a WPS button located on its front panel as well as a WPS button in
its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use
one or the other.
Note: It doesn’t matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button
within two minutes of pressing the first one.
The Device sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two
minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the Device securely.
The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by
pressing a button on both Device and wireless client.
Example WPS Process: PBC Method
Wireless Client Device
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Press and hold for
5 seconds
WLAN/
WPS
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
44
PIN Configuration
When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the Device’s web configurator
and the wireless client’s utility.
1Launch your wireless client’s configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method
to get a PIN number.
2Log into Device’s web configurator and go to the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen.
Enable the WPS function and click Apply.
3Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button. Activate WPS function on
the wireless client utility screen within two minutes.
The Device authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the
wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate
with the Device securely.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 45
The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a Device and a
wireless client by using PIN method.
Example WPS Process: PIN Method
4.3.3 Without WPS
Use the wireless adapter’s utility installed on the notebook to search for the “Example” SSID. Then
enter the “DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork” pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet
connection.
Note: The Device supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure
that your notebook or computer’s wireless adapter supports one of these
standards.
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Wireless Client
ZyXEL Device
COMMUNICATION
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
46
4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups
Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown
in the following figure. Each group has its own SSID and security mode.
• Employees in Company A will use a general Company wireless network group.
• Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group.
• Visiting guests will use the Guest group, which has a lower security mode.
Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups.
COMPANY VIP GUEST
SSID Company VIP Guest
Security Level More Secure More Secure Basic
Security Mode WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK Static WEP
Pre-Shared Key ForCompanyOnly ForVIPOnly Guest12345678
Company
VIP Guest
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 47
1Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Use this screen to set up the
company’s general wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters
and click Apply.
2Click Network Setting > Wireless > More AP to open the following screen. Click the Edit icon to
configure the second wireless network group.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
48
3Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
4In the More AP screen, click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network group.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 49
5Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
6Check the status of VIP and Guest in the More AP screen. The yellow bulbs signify that the SSIDs
are active and ready for wireless access.
4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another
Network
In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to
the Device’s LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial
shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings.
In the following figure, router R is connected to the Device’s LAN. R connects to two networks, N1
(192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
50
network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the Device’s WAN default gateway by
default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic.
You need to specify a static routing rule on the Device to specify R as the router in charge of
forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the
traffic to B.
This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS
The Device’s WAN 172.16.1.1
The Device’s LAN 192.168.1.1
IP Type IPv4
Use Interface ADSL/atm0
A192.168.1.34
R’s N1 192.168.1.253
N2
B
N1
A
R
N2
B
N1
A
R
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 51
To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
1Log into the Device’s Web Configurator in advanced mode.
2Click Network Setting > Routing.
3Click Add new static route in the Static Route screen.
4Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
4a Select the Active check box. Enter the Route Name as R.
4b Set IP Type to IPv4.
4c Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2.
4d Select Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field. Type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address)
in the Gateway IP Address field.
4e Select ADSL/atm0 as the Use Interface.
4a Click OK.
Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure B’s firewall
settings to allow specific traffic to pass through.
R’s N2 192.168.10.2
B192.168.10.33
Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
52
4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup
This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen.
Let’s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic
because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also
upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your
colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other
branch offices.
In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of
10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest
priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:
• Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic going to the WAN
interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion.
• Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for
example) of your computer and map it to queue 7.
Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the Device.
Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS
mapping table on the Device.
QoS Example
10,000 kbps
DSL
Your computer
IP=192.168.1.23
A colleague’s computer
Other traffic: Automatic classifier
and/or
MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF
Email traffic: Highest priority
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 53
1Click Network Setting > QoS > General and select Enable. Set your WAN Managed Upstream
Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the Device automatically determine this
figure). Click Apply.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS
2Click Queue Setup > Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check
Active and enter or select the following values:
•Name: E-mail
•Interface: WAN
•Priority: 1 (High)
•Weight: 8
•Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps)
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
54
3Click Class Setup > Add new Classifier to create a new class. Check Active and follow the
settings as shown in the screen below.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup
Class Name Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in this example.
From
Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select LAN1 for this
example.
Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address.
IP Address Type the IP address of your computer - 192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you
know it.
MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer - AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you
know it.
To Queue
Index Link this to an item in the Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup screen, which is the E-
mail queue created in this example.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 55
This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the
previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computer’s IP address and MAC
address to the E-mail queue (see the Source fields).
4Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Setting > QoS > Monitor. This shows
the bandwidth allotted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic.
4.7 Access the Device Using DDNS
If you connect your Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient
for you to manage the device from the Internet. The Device’s WAN IP address changes dynamically.
Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the Device using a domain name.
To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org.
This tutorial covers:
•Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
•Configuring DDNS on Your Device
•Testing the DDNS Setting
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS.
4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
1Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org.
2Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and
password.
3Log into www.dyndns.org using your account.
4Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example.
•Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
•Service Type: Host with IP address
• IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your Device is currently using. You can find the IP
address on the Device’s Web Configurator Status page.
Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the Device later.
w.x.y.z a.b.c.d
http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
A
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
56
4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Device
Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS screen.
•Select Enable Dynamic DNS.
•Select www.DynDNS.com as the service provider.
•Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field.
• Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345).
Click Apply.
4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting
Now you should be able to access the Device from the Internet. To test this:
1Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the
Internet.
2Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter].
3The Device’s login page should appear. You can then log into the Device and manage it.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 57
4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter
Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and
downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she
can concentrate on preparing for her final exams.
Josephine’s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the Device. Thomas decides to
use the Security > MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to
Josephine’s computer.
1Click Security > MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen. Select the Enable check box to
activate MAC filter function.
2Select Allow. Then enter the host name and MAC address of Thomas’ computer in this screen. Click
Apply.
Thomas
Josephine
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
58
Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends.
However, Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet
through the Device.
4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer
Here is how to use an FTP program to access a file storage device connected to the Device’s USB
port.
Note: This example uses the FileZilla FTP program to browse your shared files.
1In FileZilla enter the IP address of the Device (the default is 192.168.1.1), your account’s user
name and password and port 21 and click Quickconnect. A screen asking for password
authentication appears.
File Sharing via Windows Explorer
2Once you log in the USB device displays in the mnt folder.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 59
4.10 Using the Media Server Feature
Use the media server feature to play files on a computer or on your television (using DMA-2500).
This section shows you how the media server feature works using the following media clients:
• Microsoft (MS) Windows Media Player
Media Server works with Windows Vista and Windows 7. Make sure your computer is able to play
media files (music, videos and pictures).
• ZyXEL DMA-2500, a digital media adapter
You need to set up the DMA-2500 to work with your television (TV). Refer to the DMA-2500 Quick
Start Guide for the correct hardware connections.
Before you begin, connect the USB storage device containing the media files you want to play to the
USB port of your Device.
4.10.1 Configuring the Device
Note: The Media Server feature is enabled by default.
To use your Device as a media server, click Network Setting > Home Networking > Media
Server.
Tutorial: USB Services > Media Server
Check Enable Media Server and click Apply. This enables DLNA-compliant media clients to play
the video, music and image files in your USB storage device.
4.10.2 Using Windows Media Player
This section shows you how to play the media files on the USB storage device connected to your
Device using Windows Media Player.
Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using Windows Media Player)
Computer with
ZyXEL Device
USB Storage Device
Windows Media Player
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
60
Windows Vista
1Open Windows Media Player and click Library > Media Sharing as follows.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista
2Check Find media that others are sharing in the following screen and click OK.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (2)
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 61
3In the Library screen, check the left panel. The Windows Media Player should detect the Device.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (3)
The Device displays as a playlist. Clicking on the category icons in the right panel shows you the
media files in the USB storage device attached to your Device.
Windows 7
1Open Windows Media Player. It should automatically detect the Device.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (1)
If you cannot see the Device in the left panel as shown above, right-click Other Libraries >
Refresh Other Libraries.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
62
2Select a category in the left panel and wait for Windows Media Player to connect to the Device.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2)
3In the right panel, you should see a list of files available in the USB storage device.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2)
4.10.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter
This section shows you how you can use the Device with a ZyXEL DMA-2500 to play media files
stored in the USB storage device in your TV screen.
Note: For this tutorial, your DMA-2500 should already be set up with the TV according to
the instructions in the DMA-2500 Quick Start Guide.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 63
1Connect the DMA-2500 to an available LAN port in your Device.
Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using DMA)
2Turn on the TV and wait for the DMA-2500 Home screen to appear. Using the remote control, go to
MyMedia to open the following screen. Select the Device as your media server.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500
3The screen shows you the list of available media files in the USB storage device. Select the file you
want to open and push the Play button in the remote control.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500 (2)
DMA-2500
ZyXEL Device
USB Storage Device
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
64
4.11 Using the Print Server Feature
In this section you can:
• Configure a TCP/IP Printer Port
• Add a New Printer Using Windows
• Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X
Configure a TCP/IP Printer Port
This example shows how you can configure a TCP/IP printer port. This example is done using the
Windows 2000 Professional operating system. Some menu items may look different on your
operating system. The TCP/IP port must be configured with the IP address of the Device and must
use the RAW protocol to communicate with the printer. Consult your operating systems
documentation for instructions on how to do this or follow the instructions below if you have a
Windows 2000/XP operating system.
1Click Start > Settings, then right click on Printers and select Open.
Tutorial: Open Printers Window
The Printers folder opens up. First you need to open up the properties windows for the printer you
want to configure a TCP/IP port.
2Locate your printer.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 65
3Right click on your printer and select Properties.
Tutorial: Open Printer Properties
4Select the Ports tab and click Add Port...
Tutorial: Printer Properties Window
5A Printer Ports window appears. Select Standard TCP/IP Port and click New Port...
Tutorial: Add a Port Window
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
66
6Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up. Click Next to start configuring the
printer port.
Tutorial: Add a Port Wizard
7Enter the IP address of the Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP
Address: field. In our example we use the default IP address of the Device, 192.168.1.1. The Port
Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port. Click Next.
Note: The computer from which you are configuring the TCP/IP printer port must be on
the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function.
Tutorial: Enter IP Address of the Device
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 67
8Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings.
Tutorial: Custom Port Settings
9Confirm the IP address of the Device in the IP Address field.
10 Select Raw under Protocol.
11 The Port Number is automatically configured as 9100. Click OK.
Tutorial: Custom Port Settings
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
68
12 Continue through the wizard, apply your settings and close the wizard window.
Tutorial: Finish Adding the TCP/IP Port
13 Repeat steps 1 to 12 to add this printer to other computers on your network.
Add a New Printer Using Windows
This example shows how to connect a printer to your Device using the Windows XP Professional
operating system. Some menu items may look different on your operating system.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 69
1Click Start > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes to open the Printers and Faxes screen. Click
Add a Printer.
Tutorial: Printers Folder
2The Add Printer Wizard screen displays. Click Next.
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Welcome
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
70
3Select Local printer attached to this computer and click Next.
Tutorial: Add Printe r Wizard: Local or Network Printer
4Select Create a new port and Standard TCP/IP Port. Click Next.
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Select the Printer Port
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 71
5Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up. Click Next to start configuring the
printer port.
Tutorial: Add a Port Wizard
6Enter the IP address of the Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP
Address: field. In our example we use the default IP address of the Device, 192.168.1.1. The Port
Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port. Click Next.
Note: The computer from which you are configuring the TCP/IP printer port must be on
the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function.
Tutorial: Enter IP Address of the Device
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
72
7Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings.
Tutorial: Custom Port Settings
8Confirm the IP address of the Device in the Printer Name or IP Address field.
9Select Raw under Protocol.
10 The Port Number is automatically configured as 9100. Click OK to go back to the previous screen
and click Next.
Tutorial: Custom Port Settings
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 73
11 Click Finish to close the wizard window.
Tutorial: Finish Adding the TCP/IP Port
12 Select the make of the printer that you want to connect to the print server in the Manufacturer list
of printers.
13 Select the printer model from the list of Printers.
14 If your printer is not displayed in the list of Printers, you can insert the printer driver installation
CD/disk or download the driver file to your computer, click Have Disk… and install the new printer
driver.
15 Click Next to continue.
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Printer Driver
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
74
16 If the following screen displays, select Keep existing driver radio button and click Next if you
already have a printer driver installed on your computer and you do not want to change it.
Otherwise, select Replace existing driver to replace it with the new driver you selected in the
previous screen and click Next.
Tutorial: Add Printe r Wizard: Use Existing Driver
17 Type a name to identify the printer and then click Next to continue.
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Name Your Printer
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 75
18 The Device is a print server itself and you do not need to have your computer act as a print server
by sharing the printer with other users in the same network; just select Do not share this printer
and click Next to proceed to the following screen.
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Printer Sharing
19 Select Yes and then click the Next button if you want to print a test page. A pop-up screen displays
to ask if the test page printed correctly. Otherwise select No and then click Next to continue.
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Print Test Page
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
76
20 The following screen shows your current printer settings. Select Finish to complete adding a new
printer.
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard Complete
Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X
Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer.
1Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock (a place holding a series of icons/
shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop). Proceed to step 6 to continue. If the Print Center icon is
not in the Macintosh Dock, proceed to the next step.
2On your desktop, double-click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window.
Tutorial: Macintosh HD
3Double-click the Applications folder.
Tutorial: Macintosh HD folder
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 77
4Double-click the Utilities folder.
Tutorial: Applications Folder
5Double-click the Print Center icon.
Tutorial: Utilities Folder
6Click the Add icon at the top of the screen.
Tutorial: Printer List Folder
7Set up your printer in the Printer List configuration screen. Select IP Printing from the drop-
down list box.
8In the Printer’s Address field, type the IP address of your Device.
9Deselect the Use default queue on server check box.
10 Type LP1 in the Queue Name field.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
78
11 Select your Printer Model from the drop-down list box. If the printer's model is not listed, select
Generic.
Tutorial: Printer Configuration
12 Click Add to select a printer model, save and close the Printer List configuration screen.
Tutorial: Printer Model
13 The Name LP1 on 192.168.1.1 displays in the Printer List field. The default printer Name
displays in bold type.
Tutorial: Print Server
Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete. You can now use the Device’s print server to
print from a Macintosh computer.
79
PART II
Technical Reference
80
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 81
CHAPTER 5
Network Map and Status Screens
5.1 Overview
After you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map screen appears. This shows the network
connection status of the Device and clients connected to it.
You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the Device, system resources, and
interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN).
5.2 The Network Map Screen
Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning
message appears if there is a connection problem.
If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing Mode selection box. You
can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Refresh Interval.
Figure 14 Network Map: Icon Mode
Figure 15 Network Map: List Mode
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
82
In Icon Mode, if you want to view information about a client, click the client’s name and Info.
Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client,
click Change icon/name.
In List Mode, you can also view the client’s information.
5.3 The Status Screen
Use this screen to view the status of the Device. Click Status to open this screen.
Figure 16 Status Screen
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 5 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.
Device Information
Host Name This field displays the Device system name. It is used for identification.
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 83
Model
Number This shows the model number of your Device.
Firmware
Version This is the current version of the firmware inside the Device.
WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.)
WAN Type This field displays the current WAN connection type.
MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device.
IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the WAN. Click Release to release
your IP address to 0.0.0.0. If you want to renew your IP address, click Renew.
IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.
Encapsulation This field displays the current encapsulation method.
LAN Information
IP Address This is the current IP address of the Device in the LAN.
IP Subnet
Mask This is the current subnet mask in the LAN.
DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:
Server - The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other
computers in the LAN.
Relay - The Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and
responses between the remote server and the clients.
None - The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN.
MAC
Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device.
WLAN Information
MAC
Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device.
Status This displays whether WLAN is activated.
SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in a wireless LAN.
Channel This is the channel number used by the Device now.
Security This displays the type of security mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN.
802.11
Mode This displays the type of 802.11 mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN.
WPS This displays whether WPS is activated.
Security
Firewall This displays the firewall’s current security level.
System Status
System Up
Time This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up. The Device
starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Reboot), or when you
reset it.
Current
Date/Time This field displays the current date and time in the Device. You can change this in
Maintenance> Time Setting.
System Resource
Table 5 Status Screen (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
84
CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device’s processing ability is currently used. When
this percentage is close to 100%, the Device is running at full load, and the throughput is
not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you
should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 10 on page 169).
Memory
Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device’s memory is currently used. Usually, this
percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the Device
is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 34.2 on page
283, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds.
Table 5 Status Screen (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 85
CHAPTER 6
Broadband
6.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the Device’s Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your
Device for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the
Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other
networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 17 LAN and WAN
3G (third generation) standards for the sending and receiving of voice, video, and data in a mobile
environment.
You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the Device to use this 3G connection
as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails.
Figure 18 3G WAN Connection
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the Broadband screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the
WAN settings on the Device for Internet access (Section 6.2 on page 88).
•Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection (Section 6.3 on page 96).
WAN
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
86
•Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M, and DSL PhyR functions
(Section 6.4 on page 100).
•Use the 8021x screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the Device (Section 6.5
on page 101).
6.1.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set
up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your
ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP
over Ethernet), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user
authentication.
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device, which makes it accessible from an outside
network. It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be
static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and
DNS server IP address(es).
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data
transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of
Table 6 WAN Setup Overview
LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION
CONNECTION DSL LINK
TYPE MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS
ADSL/VDSL
over PTM N/A Routing PPPoE PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP
address, routing feature, DNS
server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
IPoE IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing
feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS,
and MTU
Bridge N/A VLAN and QoS
ADSL over ATM EoA Routing PPPoE/PPP0A ATM PCV configuration, PPP
information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address,
routing feature, DNS server, VLAN,
QoS, and MTU
IPoE/IPoA ATM PCV configuration, IPv4/IPv6
IP address, routing feature, DNS
server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
Bridge N/A ATM PCV configuration, and QoS
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 87
Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit
(VC) between Finding Out More
PTM
Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM,
packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed
to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an
alternative to ATM.
3G
3G (Third Generation) is a digital, packet-switched wireless technology. Bandwidth usage is
optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when
they send data. It allows fast transfer of voice and non-voice data and provides broadband Internet
access to mobile devices.
IPv6 Introduction
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses. The Device can use IPv4/IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks, and
supports IPv6 rapid deployment (6RD).
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So
2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as
2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double
colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So
2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as
2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
88
IPv6 Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
6.1.3 Before You Begin
You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this
information from your ISP.
6.2 The Broadband Screen
Use this screen to change your Device’s Internet access settings. Click Network Setting >
Broadband from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services
(connections) on the Device.
Figure 19 Network Setting > Broadband
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new WAN
Interface Click this button to create a new connection.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Name This is the service name of the connection.
Type This shows whether it is an ATM, PTM, or Ethernet connection.
Mode This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode.
Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection.
802.1p This indicates the 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This
displays N/A when there is no priority level assigned.
802.1q This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This
displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned.
IGMP Proxy This shows whether the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection.
NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection.
Default
Gateway This shows whether the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
default gateway.
IPv6 This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection. IPv6 is not available when
the connection uses the bridging service.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 89
6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection
Click Add new WAN Interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN
interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the interface type, mode,
encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode you select.
6.2.1.1 Routing Mode
Use Routing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to
share an Internet account.
The following example screen displays when you select the ADSL over ATM connection type,
Routing mode, and PPPoE encapsulation. The screen varies when you select other interface type,
encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode.
Figure 20 Routing Mode
MLD Proxy This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is activated or not for this
connection. MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection.
Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection.
Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
90
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Routing Mode
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Name Specify a descriptive name for this connection.
Type Select whether it is an ADSL/VDSL over PTM or ADSL over ATM connection.
Mode Select Routing if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to
share an Internet account.
Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This
option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field.
The choices depend on the connection type you selected. If your connection type is ADSL/
VDSL over PTM, the choices are PPPoE and IPoE. If your connection type is ADSL over
ATM, the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE and IPoA.
IPv6/IPv4 Mode Select IPv4 Only if you want the Device to run IPv4 only.
Select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time.
Select IPv6 Only if you want the Device to run IPv6 only.
ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.)
VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM
traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
DSL Link Type This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the Encapsulation field.
EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have
multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own
MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for
different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging
encapsulation methods.
PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.
IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC.
Encapsulation
Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices
are:
•LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by
identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when
you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field.
•VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit
(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding
between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces
payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol
Data Unit (PDU) payload.
•LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This
is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field.
•LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC)
header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be
followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is
available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 91
Service
Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive,
such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data
traffic.
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections
that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate
(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This
field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR.
Sustainable
Cell Rate The Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be
transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0
cells/sec.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR.
Maximum Burst
Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the
peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR.
PPP
Information This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Mode field.
PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form
user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly
as given.
PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above.
PPP Auto
Connect Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out.
IDLE Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically
disconnects from the PPPoE server.
This field is not configurable if you select PPP Auto Connect.
PPPoE Service
Name Enter the name of your PPPoE service here.
PPPoE
Passthrough This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
In addition to the Device’s built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow
up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the
ISP via the Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.
PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate.
Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client
software on their computers to connect to the ISP.
IP Address This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/
IPv4 Mode field.
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed;
the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you
have a dynamic IP address.
Static IP
Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
Subnet
Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Table 8 Routing Mode (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
92
Gateway IP
Address Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.
Routing Feature This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/
IPv4 Mode field.
NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection.
IGMP Proxy
Enable Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.
Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows
the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Apply as
Default
Gateway
Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
default gateway.
DNS Server This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/
IPv4 Mode field.
DNS Select Dynamic if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP.
Select Static if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually.
DNS Server 1 Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
DNS Server 2 Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
IPv6 Address This is available only when you select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv6/
IPv4 Mode field.
IPv6 Address Select Automatic if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected
router’s Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address.
Select the Get IPv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server checkbox if you want to obtain an
IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has
priority over the IP address automatically generated by the Device using the IPv6 prefix
from an RA. This option is available only when you choose to get your IPv6 address
automatically.
Select Static if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.
WAN IPv6
Address Enter the IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.
Prefix
Length Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address
compose the network address.
Next Hop Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the
same segment as your Device's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their
destinations.
IPv6 Routing
Feature You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section.
MLD Proxy
Enable Select this checkbox to have the Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows
the Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Apply as
Default
Gateway
Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
default gateway.
IPv6 DNS
Server Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section.
Table 8 Routing Mode (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 93
6.2.1.2 Bridge Mode
Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon
next to the connection you want to configure. Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode. The screen
varies depending on the interface type you select.
IPv6 DNS Select Dynamic to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP
automatically.
Select Static to have the Device use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure
manually.
IPv6 DNS
Server 1 Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
IPv6 DNS
Server 2 Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
VLAN These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM.
Active Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this
connection.
802.1p IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame
that contains bits to define class of service.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection.
The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
802.1q Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
QoS
Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for
traffic on this connection.
MTU
MTU Size Enter the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) size for this traffic.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 8 Routing Mode (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
94
If you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface type, the following screen appears.
Figure 21 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM)
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 9 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Name Enter a service name of the connection.
Type Select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface that you want to configure. The Device uses
the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port.
Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you
select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and
NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
VLAN This section is available only when you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM in the Type field.
Active Select this to add the VLAN Tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this
connection.
802.1p IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame
that contains bits to define class of service.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection.
The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
802.1q Type the VLAN ID number (from 0 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
QoS
Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for
traffic on this connection.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 95
If you select ADSL over ATM as the interface type, the following screen appears.
Figure 22 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM)
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 10 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Name Enter a service name of the connection.
Type Select ADSL over ATM as the interface for which you want to configure here. The Device
uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port.
Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you
select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and
NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.)
VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM
traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
DSL Link Type This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the Encapsulation field.
EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have
multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own
MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for
different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging
encapsulation methods.
PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.
IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
96
6.3 The 3G Backup Screen
Use this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband > 3G
Backup.
Encapsulation
Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices
are:
•LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by
identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when
you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field.
•VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit
(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding
between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces
payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol
Data Unit (PDU) payload.
•LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This
is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field.
•LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC)
header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be
followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is
available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field.
Service
Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive,
such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data
traffic.
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections
that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate
(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This
field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR.
Sustainable Cell
Rate The Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be
transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0
cells/sec.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR.
Maximum Burst
Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the
peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR.
QoS
Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for
traffic on this connection.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 10 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 97
Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal
strength to the service provider’s base station, and so on.
Figure 23 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
3G Backup Select Enable to have the Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the
wired WAN connection fails.
Ping Check Select Enable if you want the Device to ping check the connection status of your WAN. You
can configure the frequency of the ping check and number of consecutive failures before
triggering 3G backup.
Check Cycle Enter the frequency of the ping check in this field.
Consecutive
Fail Enter how many consecutive failures are required before 3G backup is triggered.
Ping Default
Gateway Select this to have the Device ping the WAN interface’s default gateway IP address.
Ping the Host Select this to have the Device ping the particular host name or IP address you typed in this
field.
3G Connection Settings
Card
description This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in
the Device. Otherwise, it displays N/A.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
98
Username Type the user name (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service
provider.
Password Type the password (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name
above.
PIN A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code,
you cannot use the 3G card.
If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example)
provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by
your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet.
If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank.
Dial string Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service provider’s
base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number.
For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan.
APN Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with
different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media
Messaging Service)) and charge method.
You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed.
Connection Select Nailed UP if you do not want the connection to time out.
Select on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle
time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field.
Max Idle
Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the Device automatically
disconnects from the ISP.
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address.
Use the
following static
IP address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP
address.
Obtain DNS
info
dynamically
Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically.
Use the
following static
DNS IP address
Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually.
Primary DNS
server Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Secondary DNS
server Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Advanced Click this to show the advanced 3G backup settings.
Budget Setup
Enable Budget
Control Select Enable to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed 3G card. You can
set a limit on the total traffic and/or call time. The Device takes the actions you specified
when a limit is exceeded during the month.
Time Budget Select this and specify the amount of time (in hours) that the 3G connection can be used
within one month. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control,
the Device resets the statistics.
Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 99
Data Budget
(Mbytes) Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in Mega bytes) can be
transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.
Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.
Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device).
Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP).
If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the
statistics.
Data Budget
(kPackets) Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in k Packets) can be
transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.
Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.
Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device).
Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP).
If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the
statistics.
Reset all
budget
counters on
Select the date on which the Device resets the budget every month. Select last if you want
the Device to reset the budget on the last day of the month. Select specific and enter the
number of the date you want the Device to reset the budget
Reset time and
data budget
counters
Click this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately. The count starts over with
the 3G connection’s full configured monthly time and data budgets. This does not affect the
normal monthly budget restart; so if you configured the time and data budget counters to
reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first, the time and data
budget counters will still reset on the second.
Actions before
over budget Specify the actions the Device takes before the time or data limit exceeds.
Enable % of
time budget/
data budget
(Mbytes)/data
budget
(kPackets)
Select Enable and enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields. If you change the
value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics.
Actions when
over budget Specify the actions the Device takes when the time or data limit is exceeded.
Current 3G
connection Select Keep to maintain an existing 3G connection or Drop to disconnect it.
Enable Email
Notification Select this to enable the e-mail notification function. The Device will e-mail you a
notification when there over budget occurs.
Mail Server Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below.
If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must
have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance > Email Notification screen.
Over Budget
Email Title Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the Device
sends.
Send
Notification to
Email
Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
notifications cannot be sent via e-mail.
Interval Enter the interval of how many minutes you want the Device to e-mail you.
Enable Log Select this to activate the logging function at the interval you set in this field.
Basic Click this to hide the advanced settings of 3G backup.
Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
100
6.4 The Advanced Screen
Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M, and DSL PhyR functions.
The Device supports the PhyR retransmission scheme. PhyR is a retransmission scheme designed to
provide protection against noise on the DSL line. It improves voice, video and data transmission
resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer.
Click Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced to display the following screen.
Figure 24 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 12 Network Setting > Network Setting > Broadband
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PTM over ADSL Select Enable to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM, some ISPs
use PTM over ADSL for better performance.
Annex M You can enable Annex M for the Device to use double upstream mode to increase the
maximum upstream transfer rate.
PhyR US Enable or disable PhyR US (upstream) for upstream transmission to the WAN. PhyR US
should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise. However,
enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the
CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it
enabled.
PhyR DS Enable or disable PhyR DS (downstream) for downstream transmission from the WAN.
PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise.
However, enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will
require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and
have it enabled.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 101
6.5 The 8021x Screen
You can view and configure the 802.1x authentication settings in the 8021x screen. Click Network
Setting > Broadband > 8021x to display the following screen.
Figure 25 Network Setting > Broadband > 8021x
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Network Setting > Network Setting > 8021x
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the authentication is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that
this authentication is active. A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active.
Interface This is the interface that uses the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
interface assigned.
EAP Identity This shows the EAP identity of the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no EAP
identity assigned.
EAP method This shows the EAP method used in the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
EAP method assigned.
Bidirectional
Authentication This shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed.
Certificate This shows the certificate used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
certificate assigned.
Trusted CA This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
Trusted CA assigned.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
102
6.5.1 Edit 802.1x Settings
Use this screen to edit a 802.1x authentication’s settings. Click the Edit icon next to the rule you
want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 26 802.1x: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.6 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described
in this chapter.
Table 14 802.1x: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate the authentication.
Select this to enable the authentication. Clear this to disable this authentication without
having to delete the entry.
EAP Identity Enter the EAP identity of the authentication.
EAP method This is the EAP method used for this authentication.
Enable
Bidirectional
Authentication
Select this to allow bidirectional authentication.
Certificate Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the
certificate in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen.
Trusted CA Select the Trusted CA you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the
certificate in the Security > Certificates > Trusted CA screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 103
Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Device can work in bridge mode
or routing mode. When the Device is in routing mode, it supports the following methods.
IP over Ethernet
IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an
Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface
and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged
environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells.
PPP over ATM (PPPoA)
PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection
functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on
RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service
Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information
on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.
PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a
manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how
a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.)
connection.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing
access control systems (for example RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a
function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and
offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on
the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Device does that part of the task.
Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
RFC 1483
RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit
(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a
separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed
information.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
104
Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to
use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
VC-based Multiplexing
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for
example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where
dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
LLC-based Multiplexing
In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained
in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be
advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if
charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate
and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate
congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video
connections.
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may
be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a
maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed
because it is dependent on the line speed.
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the
maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be
greater than the PCR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS
is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more
cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that
correlates to your upstream line rate.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 105
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 27 Example of Traffic Shaping
ATM Traffic Classes
These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0
Specification.
Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being
sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections
that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds
this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution
video and voice.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use
the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time
(VBR-nRT) connections.
The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely
controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is
specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would
be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth
requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical
on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an
VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't
guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An
example application is background file transfer.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
106
IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a
different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have
either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices
for IP address and default gateway.
Introduction to VLANs
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of
another user in the same building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more
manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets
go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast
domain.
Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership
of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The
VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a
frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame
across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two
bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame)
and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet
frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If
a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as
it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum
number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A
frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority
level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the
4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved,
so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 Bits
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 107
Multicast
IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast
(1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the
network - not everybody and not just 1.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an
improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to
read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please
see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be
in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group
and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is
assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the
224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast
routers group.
At start up, the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After
that, the Device periodically updates this information.
DNS Server Address Assignment
Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely
important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access
it.
The Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
1The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you
sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields.
2If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the Device’s WAN IP
address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
108
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 109
CHAPTER 7
Wireless
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the Device’s Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to
set up your Device’s wireless connection.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
This section describes the Device’s Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your Device’s
wireless connection.
•Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless
security mode (Section 7.2 on page 110).
•Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your Device (Section 7.3 on
page 117).
•Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC
addresses from connecting to the Device (Section 7.4 on page 119).
•Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal
Identification Number) (Section 7.5 on page 120).
•Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless
networks for multimedia applications (Section 7.6 on page 122).
•Use the WDS screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the Device acts as a
bridge with other ZyXEL access points (Section 7.7 on page 123).
•Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold
(Section 7.8 on page 125).
•Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results
(Section 7.9 on page 127).
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
110
7.1.2 What You Need to Know
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and
receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one
another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange
information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking
devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to
use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in
that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data
encryption.
Finding Out More
See Section 7.10 on page 127 for advanced technical information on wireless networks.
7.2 The General Screen
Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode.
Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN
and you change the Device’s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your
wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the
wireless settings of your computer to match the Device’s new settings.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 111
Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen.
Figure 28 Network Setting > Wireless > General
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Band This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using. 2.4GHz is the frequency used
by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients.
Channel Set the channel depending on your particular region.
Select a channel or use Auto to have the Device automatically determine a channel to use.
If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try
to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs
as possible. The channel number which the Device is currently using then displays next to
this field.
more.../less Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them.
Bandwidth Select whether the Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or 40MHz.
A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz
channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps.
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase
throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20
MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal.
Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your
neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
112
7.2.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any
data encryption or authentication.
Control
Sideband This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth
field to 40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Channel field) should be in the
Lower or Upper range of channel bands.
Passphrase
Type If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the Device generate a password, the
setting in this field determines how the Device generates the password.
Select None to set the Device’s password generation to not be based on a passphrase.
Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password.
Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password.
Passphrase Key For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It
must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no
spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless
Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other
through the Device.
MBSSID/LAN
Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other
SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the Device.
Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSID’s wireless
clients to only connect to the Internet through the Device.
Enhanced
Multicast
Forwarding
Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless
unicast traffic.
BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is
enabled.
Security Level
Security Mode Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this
wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have
same wireless security settings as the Device. When you select to use a security, additional
options appears in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data
encryption or authentication.
See the following sections for more details about this field.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 113
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device, your network is
accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 29 Wireless > General: No Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption)
WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points
(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points
must use the same WEP key.
Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using
widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more
effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the
wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices
support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing
stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available.
Your Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be
enabled at any one time.
Table 16 Wireless > General: No Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Choose No Security to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or
authentication.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
114
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the
General screen, then select Basic as the security level.
Figure 30 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 17 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field
will not be configurable when you select this option.
Password 1~4 The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless
stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one
time. The default password is Passowrd 1.
more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WEP Encryption Select 64-bits or 128-bits.
This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 115
7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK)
The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over
WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the Device and the connecting client share a common
password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong
as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of
the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it
less robust than it could be.
Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list.
Figure 31 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Security Mode Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field
will not be configurable when you select this option.
Password The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only
difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of
user-specific credentials.
If you did not select Generate password automatically, you can manually type a pre-
shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters.
more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WPA-PSK
Compatible This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode.
Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your
Device. The Device supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
116
7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication
The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It
requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security
protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least
backwards compatible with older devices.
The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server
on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than
WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices.
Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list.
Figure 32 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Encryption Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.
Group Key
Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group
key out to all clients.
Table 18 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box.
Authentication Server
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 117
7.3 The More AP Screen
This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the Device.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > More AP. The following screen displays.
Figure 33 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP
IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation.
Port
Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is
1812.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so
with additional information.
Shared
Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external authentication server and the Device.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device. The key is
not sent over the network.
more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WPA
Compatible This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the Device to support WPA and
WPA2 simultaneously.
Encryption Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.
WPA2 Pre-
Authentication This field is available only when you select WPA2.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting
to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Select Enabled to turn on preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select Disabled.
Network Re-
auth Interval Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to
stay connected.
If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer
on the RADIUS server has priority.
Group Key
Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group
key out to all clients.
Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
118
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.3.1 Edit More AP
Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen.
The following screen displays.
Figure 34 More AP: Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 20 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is
active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active.
SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Device’s BSSs. The SSID
(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated.
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client
scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless
client utility.
Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
Table 21 More AP: Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 119
7.4 MAC Authentication
This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices
(Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device (Deny). Every Ethernet
device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the
factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You
need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
Passphrase
Type If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the Device generate a password, the
setting in this field determines how the Device generates the password.
Select None to set the Device’s password generation to not be based on a passphrase.
Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password.
Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password.
Passphrase Key For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It
must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no
spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless
Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other.
MBSSID/LAN
Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other
SSIDs or LAN devices.
Enhanced
Multicast
Forwarding
Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless
unicast traffic.
Security Level
Security Mode Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this
wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have
same wireless security settings as the Device. After you select to use a security, additional
options appears in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data
encryption or authentication.
See Section 7.2.1 on page 112 for more details about this field.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 21 More AP: Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
120
Use this screen to view your Device’s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click
Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 35 Wireless > MAC Authentication
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.5 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your Device.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS. See Section 7.10.9.3 on page 136 for more information about WPS.
Table 22 Wireless > MAC Authentication
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SSID Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings.
MAC Restrict
Mode
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.
Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering.
Select Deny to block access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to
access the Device.
Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access
to the Device.
Add new MAC
address Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below.
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that
is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
#This is the index number of the entry.
MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
Device.
Modify Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 121
Note: The Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see Section 7.2 on
page 110). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the
security mode of SSID1 to WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or No Security.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click
Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen.
Figure 36 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WPS Select Enable to activate WPS on the Device.
Method 1 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC).
Connect Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the
Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the
outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Connect button on this screen.
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of pressing
this button.
Method 2 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the
Device.
Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click
Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s
settings.
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN
to the Device.
Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the Device into the
client.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
122
7.6 The WMM Screen
Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for
multimedia applications.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays.
Figure 37 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Release
Configuratio
n
The default WPS status is configured.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS
connections on the Device.
Generate
New PIN
Number
The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the Device is shown here. Enter this PIN in the
configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Click the Generate New PIN Number button to have the Device create a new PIN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 23 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WMM Select On to have the Device automatically give a service a priority level according to the
ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of
Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.
WMM
Automatic
Power Save
Delivery
Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices (especially useful for
small devices that are running multimedia applications). The Device goes to sleep mode to
save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the Device
until the Device "wakes up". The Device wakes up periodically to check for incoming data.
Note: Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the Device is connected also
supports this feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 123
7.7 The WDS Screen
An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge
allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to
configure the Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled.
Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the Device and
other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security
settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the Device and any
wireless clients.
Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models
support WDS links. Check your other AP’s documentation.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WDS. The following screen displays.
Figure 38 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Bridge Setup
AP Mode Select the operating mode for your Device.
•Access Point - The Device functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously.
•Wireless Bridge - The Device acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes
wireless links with other APs. In this mode, clients cannot connect to the Device
wirelessly.
Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access Point.
Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device’s MAC address manually in the
table below. Select Disable to turn off WDS.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
124
7.7.1 WDS Scan
You can click the Scan icon in Wireless > WDS to have the Device automatically search and
display the available APs within range. Select an AP and click Apply to have the Device establish a
wireless link with the selected wireless device.
Figure 39 WDS: Scan
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Remote Bridge
MAC Address You can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under Modify.
# This is the index number of the entry.
MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the peer device.
You can connect to up to 4 peer devices.
Modify Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address
format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc).
Click the Delete icon to remove this entry.
Scan Click the Scan icon to search and display the available APs within range.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 26 WDS: Scan
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Bridge Scan Setup
Refresh Click Refresh to update the table.
# This is the index number of the entry.
SSID This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range.
BSSID This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 125
7.8 The Others Screen
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless >
Others. The screen appears as shown.
See Section 7.10.2 on page 129 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen.
Figure 40 Network Setting > Wireless > Others
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Network Setting > Wireless > Others
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS
Threshold Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS
(Clear To Send) handshake.
Enter a value between 0 and 2347.
Fragmentation
Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and
2346.
Auto Channel
Timer If you set the channel to Auto in the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen,
specify the interval in minutes for how often the Device scans for the best channel. Enter 0
to disable the periodical scan.
Output Power Set the output power of the Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease
the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 20%,
40%, 60%, 80% or 100%.
Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval.
This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again.
The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power
mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from20ms to 1000ms.
A high value helps save current consumption of the access point.
DTIM Interval Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and
multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode. A high DTIM
value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1
to 100.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
126
802.11 Mode Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the Device.
Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the Device.
Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the Device.
Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be
reduced.
Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n
compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device
might be reduced.
802.11
Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with
both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic).
Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This
helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance.
Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your Device might be
reduced in a mixed-mode network.
This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b
Only.
Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Short. See
Section 7.10.7 on page 133 for more information.
This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 27 Network Setting > Wireless > Others (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 127
7.9 The Channel Status Screen
Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Click
Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status. The screen appears as shown. Click Scan to
scan the wireless LAN channels. You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section.
Figure 41 Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status
7.10 Technical Reference
This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see Appendix D on page 339.
7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview
Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.
• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with
numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients,
extending a network’s range.
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
128
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless
clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to
one another in order to exchange information.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 42 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the
access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your
Device is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or
frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the
information that is sent in the wireless network.
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For
the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 129
variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you
create a network, you must select a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of
available channels also varies.
7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Device’s Web
Configurator.
7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview
By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this
means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data
passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to
the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to
compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to
ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried
on it.
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people
presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a “key” phrase) can access the
network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only
people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been
authenticated are given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired
Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a
determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a
user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you
use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter
long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short
key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary.
Table 28 Additional Wireless Terms
TERM DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not
aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP
at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through.
By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must
sometimes get permission to send information to the Device. The lower the value, the
more often the devices must get permission.
If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then
wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device.
Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble
modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device
does, it cannot communicate with the Device.
Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network.
Fragmentation
Threshold A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger
threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
130
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have
sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless
network should ensure that effective security is in place.
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure
information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random
and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and
her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use
“70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key.
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless
network.
7.10.3.1 SSID
Normally, the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide
the SSID instead, in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should
change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless
devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that
is sent in the wireless network.
7.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC
address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example,
00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless
network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to
use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the
correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless
network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an
authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
7.10.3.3 User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every
device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS
server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server,
you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network,
even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized
1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 131
wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and
password to use the wireless network.
7.10.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot
understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section
7.10.3.3 on page 130 for information about this.)
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users
do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or
WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network
supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have
a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two
devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should
set up Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still
possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your Device, you can also select an option (WPA
compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some
support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network
login) and select the WPA compatible option in the Device.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer
the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.
7.10.4 Signal Problems
Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance,
interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference
occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio
transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are
Table 29 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER
Weakest No Security WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
132
coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when
physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
7.10.5 BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a
wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is
disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other.
When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired
network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 43 Basic Service set
7.10.6 MBSSID
Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well
as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The Device’s
MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to
provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security
modes to different SSIDs.
Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.
7.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs
• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 133
• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs
(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s
communications (but not communicate with each other).
• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.
7.10.7 Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of
the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending
data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short
preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network
support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide
more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the
network support it, otherwise the Device uses long preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.
7.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
The Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System)
links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the
security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to
your other access point’s documentation for details.
The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a
wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can
establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1
has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2.
Figure 44 WDS Link Example
7.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)
Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless
network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WDS
AP 2
AP 1
A
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
134
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its
configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device
to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two
minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set
up a secure network by themselves.
7.10.9.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled
device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.
Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in
their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
1Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.
2Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration
utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the Device, see
Section 7.6 on page 122).
3Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the Device you must press the
WPS button for more than three seconds.
4Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name
(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s
configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
7.10.9.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be
static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking
on a button in the configuration interface).
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure
that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to
activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of
both devices to use the PIN method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client)
into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated
on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends
the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router
(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 135
1Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
2Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to
do this.
3Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the
client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the
Device, see Section 7.5 on page 120).
4Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
5If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can
either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
6Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
7Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.
8On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect,
WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If
you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
136
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer)
connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
Figure 45 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
7.10.9.3 How WPS Works
When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts
as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts
as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a
secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used
depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it
sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.
ENROLLEE
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
COMMUNICATION
This device’s
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
WPS
from other device:
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
START
WPS
START
REGISTRAR
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 137
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a
WPS-enabled access point.
Figure 46 How WPS works
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two
minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS
transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing
networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the
enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network
and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is
unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a
WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A
configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS
connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset
it to its factory defaults.
7.10.9.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are
unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
COMMUNICATION
ACTIVATE
WPS
ACTIVATE
WPS
WPS HANDSHAKE
REGISTRARENROLLEE
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
138
is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security
information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.
Figure 47 WPS: Example Network Step 1
In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar
mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must
connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the
registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies
the existing security information to Client 2.
Figure 48 WPS: Example Network Step 2
REGISTRARENROLLEE
SECURITY INFO
CLIENT 1 AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 1 AP1
ENROLLEE
CLIENT 2
EXISTING CONNECTION
SECURITY INFO
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 139
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you
cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client
2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
Figure 49 WPS: Example Network Step 3
7.10.9.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It
does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices
simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by
pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it
successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to
a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared
key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or
WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar
device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you
can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device
must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).
CLIENT 1 AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
EXISTING CONNECTION
SECURITY INFO
ENROLLEE
AP2
EXISTING CONNECTION
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
140
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button
on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled
device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the
“correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a
possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices
simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not
have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and
look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the
access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a
rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the
MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If
there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 141
CHAPTER 8
Home Networking
8.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices
are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.
Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your
Device (Section 8.2 on page 143).
•Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers
based on their MAC Addresses (Section 8.3 on page 146).
•Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the Device (Section 8.4 on page
148).
•Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP (Section 8.5 on page
149).
•Use the STB Vendor ID screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for
Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses (Section 8.8 on page 158)
•Use the LAN VLAN screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out
through individual LAN ports (Section 8.9 on page 159).
DSL
LAN
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
142
8.1.2 What You Need To Know
8.1.2.1 About LAN
IP Address
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet Mask
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
DHCP
A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your Device an IP address, subnet
mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a networking device before you can access it.
RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon)
When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation (RS) request to discover the available routers,
RADVD with Router Advertisement (RA) messages in response to the request. It specifies the
minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts. RA messages containing the address prefix.
IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address.
8.1.2.2 About UPnP
Identifying UPnP Devices
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP
compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a
UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP
network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the
network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions.
NAT traversal allows the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 143
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the Chapter 11 on page 187 for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening
firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also
be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For
security reasons, the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration.
Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™
Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD)
1.0.
See Section 8.5 on page 149 for examples of installing and using UPnP.
Finding Out More
See Section 8.10 on page 159 for technical background information on LANs.
8.1.3 Before You Begin
Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client
List screen.
8.2 The LAN Setup Screen
Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device. Click
Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen.
Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings.
1Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation.
This will become the IP address of your Device.
2Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to
leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP
address you entered.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
144
3Click Apply to save your settings.
Figure 50 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Group
Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter
13 on page 207 for how to create a new interface group.
LAN IP Setup
IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation, for
example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example
255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask
based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to
do so.
IGMP Snooping
Status Select the Enable IGMP Snooping checkbox to allows the Device to passively learn
multicast group.
IGMP Mode Select Standard Mode to have the Device forward multicast packets to a port that joins the
multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports.
Select Blocking Mode to have the Device block all unknown multicast packets from the
WAN.
DHCP Server State
DHCP Select Enable to have the Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent.
Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the Device.
Select DHCP Relay to have the Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 145
DHCP Relay
Server Address This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field.
IP Addressing
Values This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
Beginning IP
Address This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Ending IP
Address This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
DHCP Server
Lease Time This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP
addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central
computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time,
which means that past addresses are “recycled” and made available for future reassignment
to other systems.
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
Days/Hours/
Minutes Enter the lease time of the DHCP server.
DNS Values This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service
provider.
Select Dynamic if you have the Dynamic DNS service.
Select Static if you have the Static DNS service.
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the Device passes
to the DHCP clients.
LAN IPv6 Mode Setup
IPv6 State Select Enable to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the Device.
LAN IPv6 Address Setup
Delegate prefix
from WAN Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider
or an uplink router.
Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the Device’s LAN IPv6 address.
ULA IPv6 Address Setup
IPv6 Address If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 address prefix that the Device uses for the
LAN IPv6 address.
Prefix Length If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length that the Device uses to
generate the LAN IPv6 address.
An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the
address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet
mask.
MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence
of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast
groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Enable MLD Snooping to activate MLD
Snooping on the Device. This allows the Device to check MLD packets passing through it and
learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic.
Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
146
8.3 The Static DHCP Screen
This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on
their MAC Addresses.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is
assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
LAN IPv6
Address Assign
Setup
Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address:
•stateless + DNS send by RADVD: The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration.
RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) is enabled to have the Device send IPv6 prefix
information in router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations.
DHCPv6 server is disabled. (See page 142 for more information on RADVD.)
•stateless + DNS send by DHCPv6: The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration.
The DNS is provided by a DHCPv6 server.
•stateful + DHCPv6 server: The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. The
DHCPv6 server is enabled to have the Device act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6
addresses, DNS server and domain name information to DHCPv6 clients.
•stateful + DHCPv6 relay: The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. DHCPv6
Relay is enabled to have the Device relay client DHCPv6 requests.
DHCPv6 Configuration
DHCPv6 State This shows the status of the DHCPv6.
IPv6 DNS Values
IPv6 DNS
Server 1-3 Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information.
Select User-Defined if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server
IPv6 addresses the Device passes to the DHCP clients.
Select None if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers.
IPv6 Address Values
IPv6 Start
Address If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the first IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be
assigned to DHCPv6 clients.
IPv6 End
Address If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the last IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be
assigned to DHCPv6 clients.
IPv6 Domain
Name If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the domain name to be assigned to DHCPv6 clients.
IPv6 Router Advertisement State
RADVD State This shows the status of RADVD.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 147
Use this screen to change your Device’s static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting > Home
Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen.
Figure 51 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP
entry, the following screen displays.
Figure 52 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new static
lease Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device.
MAC Address The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is
unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is
assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other
adapter has a similar address.
IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Modify Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.
Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the selected entry.
Table 32 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to activate the connection between the client and the Device.
Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings.
See Chapter 13 on page 207 for how to create a new interface group.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
148
8.4 The UPnP Screen
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for
simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a
network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network.
In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
See page 142 for more information on UPnP.
Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device. Click Network Setting >
Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next.
Figure 53 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Select Device Info If you select Manual Input, you can manually type in the MAC address and IP address of
a computer on your LAN. You can also choose the name of a computer from the drop list
and have the MAC Address and IP Address auto-detected.
MAC Address If you select Manual Input, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN.
IP Address If you select Manual Input, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the
computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 32 Static DHCP: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 33 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UPnP Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open
the web configurator's login screen without entering the Device's IP address (although you
must still enter the password to access the web configurator).
UPnP NAT-T Select Enable to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Device so
that they can communicate through the Device by using NAT traversal. UPnP applications
automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP
enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP
enabled application.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 149
8.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example
This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.
Installing UPnP in Windows Me
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.
1Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
2Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box.
Click Details.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 33 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
150
3In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the
Components selection box.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components
4Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next.
5Restart the computer when prompted.
Installing UPnP in Windows XP
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.
1Click Start and Control Panel.
2Double-click Network Connections.
3In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional
Networking Components ….
Network Co nnections
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 151
4The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking
Service in the Components selection box and click Details.
Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
5In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box.
Networking Services
6Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and
click Next.
8.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP
installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Device.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
152
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device. Turn on your computer and the
Device.
Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
1Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under
Internet Gateway.
2Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Network Co nnections
3In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there
were automatically created.
Internet Connection Properties
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 153
4You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
5When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be
deleted automatically.
6Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in
the system tray.
System Tray Icon
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
154
7Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Internet Connection Status
Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the Device without finding out the IP
address of the Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device.
Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.
1Click Start and then Control Panel.
2Double-click Network Connections.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 155
3Select My Network Places under Other Places.
Network Co nnections
4An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network.
5Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen
displays.
Network Co nnections: My Netw ork Places
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
156
6Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with
basic information about the Device.
Network Co nnections: My Netw ork Places: Proper ties: Example
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 157
8.7 The Additional Subnet Screen
Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP.
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same
Ethernet interface. The Device supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet
interface with the Device itself as the gateway for the LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can
also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet).
If your ISP provides the Public LAN service, the Device may use an LAN IP address that can be
accessed from the WAN.
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet to display the screen shown
next.
Figure 54 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Alias Setup
Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings. See
Chapter 13 on page 207 for how to create a new interface group.
Active Select the checkbox to configure a LAN network for the Device.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your Device in dotted decimal notation.
IP Subnet Mask Your Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you
assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the
Device.
Public LAN
Active Select the checkbox to enable the Public LAN feature. Your ISP must support Public LAN and
Static IP.
IP Address Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the public IP subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
158
8.8 The STB Vendor ID Screen
Set Top Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes don’t renew their IP addresses
before the lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an
IP address that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to list the Vendor IDs of connected
STBs to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP
addresses.
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen.
Figure 55 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Offer Public IP
by DHCP Select the checkbox to enable the Device to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server.
Enable ARP
Proxy Select the checkbox to enable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) proxy.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Vendor ID 1 ~
5Enter the STB’s vendor ID.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 159
8.9 The LAN VLAN Screen
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN to open this screen. Use this screen to
control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports.
Figure 56 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Lan Port These represent the Device’s LAN ports.
Tag Operation Select what you want the Device to do to the IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID and priority tags of
downstream traffic before sending it out through this LAN port.
•Unchange - Don’t do anything to the traffic’s VLAN ID and priority tags.
•Add - Add VLAN ID and priority tags to untagged traffic.
•Remove - Delete one tag from tagged traffic. If the frame has double tags, this removes
the outer tag. This does not affect untagged traffic.
•Remark - Change the value of the outer VLAN ID and priority tags.
802.1P Mark Use this option to set what to do for the IEEE 802.1p priority tags when you add or remark
the tags for a LAN port’s downstream traffic. Either select Unchange to not modify the
traffic’s priority tags or select an priority from 0 to 7 to use. The larger the number, the
higher the priority.
VLAN ID If you will add or remark tags for this LAN port’s downstream traffic, specify the VLAN ID
(from 0 to 4094) to use here.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
160
8.10.1 LANs, WANs and the Device
The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There
are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network
as shown next.
Figure 57 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
8.10.2 DHCP Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Device as a DHCP
server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for
the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else
the computer must be manually configured.
IP Pool Setup
The Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the
product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to
your LAN computers.
8.10.3 DNS Server Addresses
DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a
computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are
passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.
• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when
you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in
the DHCP Setup screen.
WAN
LAN
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 161
• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of
IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS
servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Device
supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.
Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It
does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If
your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the
DHCP Setup screen.
8.10.4 LAN TCP/IP
The Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to
systems that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN
share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Device.
The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for
private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select
192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the
network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for
instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is
using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute
the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change
the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
162
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private Internets” and RFC 1466,
“Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 163
CHAPTER 9
Routing
9.1 Overview
The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN
to the Internet. To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway,
use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Device’s LAN interface. The
Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Device’s default gateway (R1). You
create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create
another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the
LAN.
Figure 58 Example of Routing Topology
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the Static Route screen to view and set up static routes on the Device (Section 9.2 on page
164).
•Use the Policy Forwarding screen to configure policy routing on the Device. (Section 9.3 on
page 165).
WAN
R1
R2
A
R3
LAN
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
164
9.2 The Routing Screen
Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the Device. Click Network Setting
> Routing > Static Route to open the following screen.
Figure 59 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new static
route Click this to configure a new static route.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active.
Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route.
Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number.
Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.
Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same
network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to
their destinations.
Interface This is the WAN interface used for this static route.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the Device.
Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the Device. A window displays asking
you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 165
9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route
Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new static route in the Routing screen or
the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 60 Routing: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.3 The Policy Forwarding Screen
Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest
path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the Device to override the default routing
behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator.
Policy-based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing.
Table 38 Routing: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without having to
delete the entry.
Route Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route.
IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6.
Destination IP
Address Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination.
IP Subnet Mask If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of
255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to
the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Use Gateway IP
Address The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN
port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
If you want to use the gateway IP address, select Enable.
Gateway IP
Address Enter the IP address of the gateway.
Use Interface Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
166
You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different
connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing.
The Policy Forwarding screen let you view and configure routing policies on the Device. Click
Network Setting > Routing > Policy Forwarding to open the following screen.
Figure 61 Network Setting > Routing > Policy Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Network Setting > Routing >Policy Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Policy
Forward Rule Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Policy Name This is the name of the rule.
Source IP This is the source IP address.
Source Subnet
Mask his is the source subnet mask address.
Protocol This is the transport layer protocol.
Source Port This is the source port number.
WAN This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this policy.
Click the Delete icon to remove a policy from the Device. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the policy.
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 167
9.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding
Click Add new Policy Forward Rule in the Policy Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next
to a policy. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route.
Figure 62 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Policy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including
spaces.
Source IP Enter the source IP address.
Source Subnet
Mask Enter the source subnet mask address.
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
Source Port Enter the source port number.
Source MAC Enter the source MAC address.
WAN Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN
interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screens.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
168
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 169
CHAPTER 10
Quality of Service (QoS)
10.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is
equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network
performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-
demand.
Configure QoS on the Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network
performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
1Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow.
The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned
a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion,
allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both
those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as
Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as
Internet radio or streaming video.
This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section
10.3 on page 171).
•The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 10.4 on page 172).
•The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 10.5 on page 174).
•The Policer Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS policers (Section 10.5 on page 174).
•The Monitor screen lets you view the Device's QoS-related packet statistics (Section 10.7 on
page 181).
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
170
10.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
QoS versus Cos
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given
the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping
similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different
priorities to different packet types.
CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS).
IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol
and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header.
Tagging and Marking
In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value,
IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes
through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide
specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker.
Traffic Shaping
Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted
with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your Device uses the Token
Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate.
Traffic
Time
Traffic Rate
Traffic
Time
Traffic Rate
(Before Traffic Shaping) (After Traffic Shaping)
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 171
Traffic Policing
Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the
basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined
criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria.
The Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single
Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions
which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 10.8 on page 182 for more information on
each metering algorithm.
10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen
Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 10.1 on
page 169 for more information.
Figure 63 Network Settings > QoS > General
Traffic
Time
Traffic Rate
Traffic
Time
Traffic Rate
(Before Traffic Policing) (After Traffic Policing)
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
172
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
10.4 The Queue Setup Screen
Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next.
Table 41 Network Setting > QoS > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
QoS Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance.
WAN Managed
Upstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate
using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces’ actual transmission speed.
For example, set the WAN interfaces’ speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has
an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps.
You can set this number higher than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. The Device
uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this
number higher than the DSL port’s actual transmission speed.
You can also set this number lower than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This will
cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this number to be 95% of the
WAN interfaces’ actual upstream transmission speed.
LAN Managed
Downstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including WLAN) that
you want to allocate using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission
speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you
use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection.
You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This
will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces’
maximum supported connection speed.
Upstream
traffic priority
Assigned by
Select how the Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows.
•None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the Device put packets into the queues
according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the
classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority.
•Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level.
•IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS
field in the IP header.
•Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets
get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time
packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like
file transfers.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 173
Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment.
Figure 64 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Queue Click this button to create a new queue entry.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue
is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active.
Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface This shows the name of the Device’s interface through which traffic in this queue passes.
Priority This shows the priority of this queue.
Weight This shows the weight of this queue.
Buffer
Management This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue.
Queue management algorithms determine how the Device should handle packets when it
receives too many (network congestion).
Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by
one when you take this action.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
174
10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue
Click Add new Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue.
Figure 65 Queue Setup: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
10.5 The Class Setup Screen
Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows
according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number,
destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select
traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
Table 43 Queue Setup: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select to enable or disable this queue.
Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied.
This field is read-only if you are editing the queue.
Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority
queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is
congested.
Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue.
If two queues have the same priority level, the Device divides the bandwidth across the
queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than
queues with smaller weights.
Buffer
Management This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management
algorithm that allows the Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full.
Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer
again (packets are transmitted out of it).
Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 175
You can give different priorities to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface.
Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority
to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications.
Click Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen.
Figure 66 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Classifier Click this to create a new classifier.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active.
Class Name This is the name of the classifier.
Classification
Criteria This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which
traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this
classifier.
DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.
802.1P Mark This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier.
VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier.
To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move
up by one when you take this action.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
176
10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class
Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open
the following screen.
Figure 67 Class Setup: Add/Edit
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 177
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Class Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable this classifier.
Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including
spaces.
Classification
Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to
the number you selected after clicking Apply.
Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list.
From Interface If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From
Interface drop-down list box.
Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic.
If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address,
DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.
If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level.
Source
Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet
Netmask Enter the source subnet mask.
Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port
number(s) of the source.
MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
Destination
Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet
Netmask Enter the source subnet mask.
Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port
number(s) of the source.
MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
Others
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
178
Service This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined
application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the
filter fields.
IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If
you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number.
DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a DHCP option.
If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class Identifier
(Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the user’s
category or application type in the matched DHCP packets.
Packet
Length This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in
the fields provided.
DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the
field provided.
802.1P This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number.
TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge)
flag.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the Device replaces the DSCP field in the
packets.
If you select Unchange, the Device keep the DSCP field in the packets.
802.1P Mark Select a priority level with which the Device replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the
packets.
If you select Unchange, the Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets.
VLAN ID If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the Device replaces the VLAN ID
of the frames.
If you select Remove, the Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding
them out.
If you select Add, the Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID.
If you select Unchange, the Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets.
Forward to
Interface Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select
Unchange, the Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table.
Table 45 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 179
10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen
Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming
traffic. Click Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 68 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class.
You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 45 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Policer Click this to create a new entry.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active.
Name This field displays the descriptive name of this policer.
Regulated
Classes This field displays the name of a QoS classifier
Meter Type This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer.
Rule These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the
member QoS classes.
Action This shows the how the policer has the Device treat different types of traffic belonging to
the policer’s member QoS classes.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the policer.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by
one when you take this action.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
180
10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer
Click Add new Policer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the
following screen.
Figure 69 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select the check box to activate this policer.
Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer.
Meter Type This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer.
The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be
transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes
which is also the bucket size.
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and
identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR), the
Committed Burst Size (CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and
identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the
Peak Information Rate (PIR).
Committed
Rate Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is
less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic.
Committed
Burst Size Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the
peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also
configured.
This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm.
Conforming
Action Specify what the Device does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (green-
marked packets).
•Pass: Send the packets without modification.
•DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to
use.
Non-
Conforming
Action
Specify what the Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and
burst size (red-marked packets).
•Drop: Discard the packets.
•DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to
use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 181
10.7 The QoS Monitor Screen
To view the Device’s QoS packet statistics, click Network Setting > QoS > Monitor. The screen
appears as shown.
Figure 70 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Available Class
Selected Class
Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier.
Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move it to the
Selected Class box.
To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the < button.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 47 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 48 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the Device to update this screen. Select No Refresh
to stop refreshing statistics.
Interface Monitor
# This is the index number of the entry.
Name This shows the name of the interface on the Device.
Pass Rate This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted
successfully.
Drop Rate This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped.
Queue Monitor
# This is the index number of the entry.
Name This shows the name of the queue.
Pass Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted
successfully.
Drop Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
182
10.8 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described
in this chapter.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN
membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user
priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that
devices need to process the frame across the network.
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The
following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates
the 802.1p).
DiffServ
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the
same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet
types.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they
receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on
the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs)
indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network
devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to
negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have
to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field
in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define
up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
Table 49 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the
variations in delay).
Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems
Network Architecture) transactions.
Level 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include
important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Level 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that
are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 183
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet
gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be
marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP
values and the configured policies.
IP Precedence
Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a
layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP
header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is
the lowest priority level and seven is the highest.
Automatic Priority Queue Assignment
If you enable QoS on the Device, the Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority
level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class.
The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the Device. On the
Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index
queues is dropped if the network is congested.
DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)
Table 50 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
PRIORITY
QUEUE
LAYER 2 LAYER 3
IEEE 802.1P USER
PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
0 1 0 000000
12
2 0 0 000000 >1100
3 3 1 001110
001100
001010
001000
250~1100
4 4 2 010110
010100
010010
010000
5 5 3 011110
011100
011010
011000
<250
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
184
Token Bucket
The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The
bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b
bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated
and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:
• A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the
size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the bucket.
• If there are no tokens in the bucket, the Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are
generated.
• If not enough tokens are available, the Device treats the packet in either one of the following
ways:
In traffic shaping:
• Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket.
In traffic policing:
•Drops it.
• Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The Device may drop these marked packets if the network
is overloaded.
Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface
can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interface’s capability. The smaller
the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be
dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10
kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps.
Single Rate Three Color Marker
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate
(CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS).
6 6 4 100110
100100
100010
100000
5 101110
101000
7 7 6 110000
111000
7
Table 50 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
PRIORITY
QUEUE
LAYER 2 LAYER 3
IEEE 802.1P USER
PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 185
The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens
are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate
(CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS).
All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green.
Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it
exceeds the EBS then it is marked red.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:
• A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in
the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the CBS bucket.
• If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the Device checks the EBS bucket. The packet
is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked
red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped.
Two Rate Three Color Marker
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate
(CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are
admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based
on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider
and client.
The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size
(CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR
and PIR respectively.
All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it
is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the
CIR then it is marked green.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:
• A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in
bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens
are removed if the packet is dropped.
• If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the Device checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked
green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater
than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
186
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 187
CHAPTER 11
Network Address Translation (NAT)
11.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Device. NAT (Network Address Translation -
NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source
address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within
another network.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s)
on your local network (Section 11.2 on page 188).
•Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local
network (Section 11.3 on page 191).
•Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the Device’s trigger port settings (Section
11.4 on page 192).
•Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 11.5 on page 195).
•Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device (Section
11.6 on page 196).
•Use the Address Mapping screen to configure the Device's address mapping settings (Section
11.7 on page 196).
11.1.2 What You Need To Know
Inside/Outside
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers
of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside
hosts.
Global/Local
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
188
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP,
that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network
appear as a single computer to the outside world.
Finding Out More
See Section 11.8 on page 198 for advanced technical information on NAT.
11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen
Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your
local network.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP
address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can
support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to
specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or
a range of ports.
The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix F on page 361. Please refer
to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 189
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 71 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen.
See Appendix F on page 361 for port numbers commonly used for particular services.
Figure 72 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 51 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this to add a new rule.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule
is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name This shows the service’s name.
WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
WAN IP This field displays the incoming packet’s destination IP address.
Server IP
Address This is the server’s IP address.
Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service.
End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service.
Translation
Start Port This is the first internal port number that identifies a service.
Translation End
Port This is the last internal port number that identifies a service.
A=192.168.1.33
D=192.168.1.36
C=192.168.1.3
B=192.168.1.34
WAN
LAN
192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
190
11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding
Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to
open the following screen.
Figure 73 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Protocol This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UDP, or TCP/
UDP.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Table 51 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 52 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Clear the checkbox to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on).
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled.
WAN IP Enter the WAN IP address for which the incoming service is destined. If the packet’s
destination IP address doesn’t match the one specified here, the port forwarding rule will
not be applied.
Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in
the End Port field.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 191
11.3 The Applications Screen
This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this
screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones.
To access this screen, click Network Setting > NAT > Applications. The following screen
appears.
Figure 74 Network Setting > NAT > Applications
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
End Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then
enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port
number in the Start Port field above.
Translation
Start Port This shows the port number to which you want the Device to translate the incoming port.
For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming
ports translated.
Translation End
Port This shows the last port of the translated port range.
Server IP
Address Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here.
Protocol Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 52 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Applications
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new
application Click this to add a new NAT application rule.
Application
Forwarded This field shows the type of application that the service forwards.
WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Server IP
Address This field displays the destination IP address for the service.
Modify Click the Delete icon to delete the rule.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
192
11.3.1 Add New Application
This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add new application in the
Applications screen to open the following screen.
Figure 75 Applications: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
11.4 The Port Triggering Screen
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on
the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service
(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN).
The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to
use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN
computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take
turns using the service. The Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to
the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the
Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open" port), the
Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that
computer’s connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in
the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a
different LAN computer to use the application.
Table 54 Applications: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to.
Server IP
Address Enter the inside IP address of the application here.
Application
Category Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box.
Application
Forwarded Select a service from the drop-down list box and the Device automatically configures the
protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service.
View Rule Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application
Fowarded.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 193
For example:
Figure 76 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
1Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
2Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the Device to record Jane’s computer IP address. The
Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170.
3The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
4The Device forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
5Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The
Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP
(Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen. Use this screen to
view your Device’s trigger port settings.
Figure 77 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this to create a new rule.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies
that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule.
WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Trigger Start
Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record
the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
Trigger End
Port This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Trigger Proto. This is the trigger transport layer protocol.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
194
11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule
This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering
screen or click a rule’s Edit icon to open the following screen.
Figure 78 Port Triggering: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends
out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to
the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
Open End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Open Proto. This is the open transport layer protocol.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Table 55 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 56 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select the check box to enable this rule.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on).
WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules.
Trigger Start
Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record
the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger End
Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 195
11.5 The DMZ Screen
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default
server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup
screen.
Figure 79 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends
out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to
the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 56 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 57 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Default Server
Address Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not
specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the Device discards all packets
received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
196
11.6 The ALG Screen
Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls
to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream.
When the Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the Device’s private
IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an
outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG.
Use this screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device. To access this
screen, click Network Setting > NAT > ALG.
Figure 80 Network Setting > NAT > ALG
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
11.7 The Address Mapping Screen
Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify.
When a rule matches the current packet, the Device takes the corresponding action and the
remaining rules are ignored.
Click Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping to display the following screen.
Figure 81 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping
Table 58 Network Setting > NAT > ALG
LABEL DESCRIPTION
NAT ALG Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work
correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules.
SIP ALG Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-
mapping rules.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 197
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule
To add or edit an address mapping rule, click Add new rule or the rule’s edit icon in the Address
Mapping screen to display the screen shown next.
Figure 82 Address Mapping: Add/Edit
Table 59 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this to create a new rule.
Set This is the index number of the address mapping set.
Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).
Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then
this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local
End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types.
Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic
IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type.
Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and
Many-to-One mapping types.
Type This is the address mapping type.
One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port
numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is
equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account
feature that previous routers supported only.
Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent
address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
198
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
11.8 Technical Reference
This part contains more information regarding NAT.
11.8.1 NAT Definitions
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers
of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside
hosts.
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
Table 60 Address Mapping: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Type Choose the IP/port mapping type from one of the following.
One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port
numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is
equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account
feature that previous routers supported only.
Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
Local Start IP Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).
Local End IP Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then
this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local
End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types.
Global Start IP Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic
IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type.
Global End IP Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and
Many-to-One mapping types.
Set Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 199
Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address
of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in
a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP
address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table
summarizes this information.
NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
11.8.2 What NAT Does
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note
that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP.
In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local
network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-
to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall
protection. With no servers defined, your Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing
intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC
1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT).
Table 61 NAT Definitions
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Inside This refers to the host on the LAN.
Outside This refers to the host on the WAN.
Local This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
LAN.
Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
WAN.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
200
11.8.3 How NAT Works
Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets,
the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global
Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination
address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local)
IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It
replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and
Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The
Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have
their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 83 How NAT Works
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12 SA
192.168.1.10
SA
IGA1
Inside Local
IP Address
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12
192.168.1.13
Inside Global
IP Address
IGA 1
IGA 2
IGA 3
IGA 4
NAT Table
WAN
LAN
Inside Local
Address (ILA) Inside Global
Address (IGA)
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 201
11.8.4 NAT Application
The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs
using IP alias) behind the Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.
Figure 84 NAT Application With IP Alias
Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for
further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples
and details on port forwarding and NAT.
Table 62 Services and Port Numbers
SERVICES PORT NUMBER
ECHO 7
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 21
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) 25
DNS (Domain Name System) 53
Finger 79
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) 80
POP3 (Post Office Protocol) 110
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) 119
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 161
SNMP trap 162
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) 1723
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
202
Port Forwarding Example
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 85 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
D=192.168.1.36
192.168.1.1
IP address assigned by ISP
A=192.168.1.33
B=192.168.1.34
C=192.168.1.35
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 203
CHAPTER 12
Dynamic DNS Setup
12.1 Overview
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a machine before you can access it.
In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static
or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain
domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The Device uses a system
DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do
not match any DNS routing entry. After the Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it
creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table.
Dynamic DNS
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic
DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access
your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance
myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an
IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for
people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name.
The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 12.2 on page
204).
•Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the Device
(Section 12.3 on page 205).
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
204
12.1.2 What You Need To Know
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same
IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example,
www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
12.2 The DNS Entry Screen
Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Device. Click Network Setting > DNS to
open the DNS Entry screen.
Figure 86 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 63 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new DNS
entry Click this to create a new DNS entry.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Hostname This indicates the host name or domain name.
IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 205
12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry
You can manually add or edit the Device’s DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add new DNS
entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen
shown next appears.
Figure 87 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen
Use this screen to change your Device’s DDNS. Click Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 88 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS
Table 64 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name Enter the host name of the DNS entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS entry.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
206
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 65 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS Select Enable to use dynamic DNS.
Service
Provider Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box.
Hostname Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider.
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").
Username Type your user name.
Password Type the password assigned to you.
Email If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the user name you used to register
for this service.
Key If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the password you used to register for
this service.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 207
CHAPTER 13
Interface Group
13.1 Overview
By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the Device are in the same group and can communicate
with each other. Create interface groups to have the Device assign the IP addresses in different
domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the Device. This lets
devices connected to an interface group’s LAN interfaces communicate through the interface
group’s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Interface Group screens let you create multiple networks on the Device (Section 13.2 on
page 207).
13.2 The Interface Group Screen
You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the Device
automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an
interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface
group.
Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the Device assigns to
the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the Device to assign IP addresses
based on the client’s DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and
configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 8 on page
141 for more information.
Chapter 13 Interface Group
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
208
In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT
5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses
the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface.
Figure 89 Interface Grouping Application
Click Network Setting > Interface Group to open the following screen.
Figure 90 Network Setting > Interface Group
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
13.2.1 Interface Group Configuration
Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following
screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group.
Table 66 Network Setting > Interface Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New
Interface Group Click this button to create a new interface group.
Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group.
WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group.
LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group.
Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the group.
Modify Click the Delete icon to remove the group.
Add Click this button to create a new group.
Default: ETH 2~4
Internet
192.168.1.x/24
192.168.2.x/24
VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1
eth10.0
DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0
Chapter 13 Interface Group
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 209
Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time.
Figure 91 Interface Group Configuration
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 67 Interface Group Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group Name Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters,
numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed.
WAN Interface
used in the
grouping
Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM interface and
up to one ATM interface.
Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group.
Grouped LAN
Interfaces
Available LAN
Interfaces
Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the Available
LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces
list to add the interfaces to this group.
To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces, use the
right-facing arrow.
Automatically
Add Clients
With the
following DHCP
Vendor IDs
Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of
the hardware or firmware. See Section 13.2.2 on page 210 for more information.
#This shows the index number of the rule.
Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received
will belong to this group automatically.
WildCard
Support This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled.
Chapter 13 Interface Group
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
210
13.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria
Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following
screen.
Figure 92 Interface Grouping Criteria
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Remove Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the Device.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 67 Interface Group Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 68 Interface Grouping Criteria
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source MAC
Address Enter the source MAC address of the packet.
DHCP Option
60 Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic,
such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
Enable
wildcard on
DHCP
option 60
option
Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for
DHCP option 60.
DHCP Option
61 Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic.
IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN
connection index number.
Chapter 13 Interface Group
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 211
DUID type Select DUID-LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to enter the hardware
type, a time value and the MAC address of the device.
Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number) to enter the
vendor’s registered enterprise number.
Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the device’s hardware type
and hardware address (MAC address) in the following fields.
Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field.
DHCP Option
125 Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic.
Enterprise
Number Enter the vendor’s 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority).
Manufactur
er OUI Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes
of the MAC address.
Product
Class Enter the product class of the device.
Model
Name Enter the model name of the device.
Serial
Number Enter the serial number of the device.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 68 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Interface Group
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
212
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 213
CHAPTER 14
USB Service
14.1 Overview
The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. In the
USB Service screens, you can enable file-sharing server, media server, and printer server.
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the File Sharing screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 14.2 on page 214).
•Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files (Section 14.3 on
page 216).
•Use the Printer Server screen to enable the print server (Section 14.4 on page 217).
14.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
14.1.2.1 About File Sharing
Workgroup name
This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources
such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a
network.
Shares
When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the Device is given a folder, called
a “share”. If a USB hard drive connected to the Device has more than one partition, then each
partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a “share” to be a sub-folder or file on the
USB device.
File Systems
A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often
different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file sharing
feature on your Device supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32.
Common Internet File System
The Device uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS
compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the Device. CIFS
Chapter 14 USB Service
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
214
protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to
your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility).
14.1.2.2 About Printer Server
Print Server
This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers, and which sends print jobs
to each printer from the computer itself or other devices.
Operating System
An operating system (OS) is the interface which helps you manage a computer. Common examples
are Microsoft Windows, Mac OS or Linux.
TCP/IP
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) is a set of communications protocols that
most of the Internet runs on.
Port
A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer, such as a
process run by your web browser. When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer, the
port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for.
Supported OSs
Your operating system must support TCP/IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW (port
9100) protocol.
The following OSs support Device’s printer sharing feature.
• Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE (Second Edition), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, Windows XP or Macintosh OS X.
14.2 The File Sharing Screen
You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your Device with users on
your network.
Chapter 14 USB Service
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 215
The following figure is an overview of the Device’s file server feature. Computers A and B can
access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the Device.
Figure 93 File Sharing Overview
The Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions
set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network
administrator.
14.2.1 Before You Begin
Make sure the Device is connected to your network and turned on.
1Connect the USB device to one of the Device’s USB port. Make sure the Device is connected to your
network.
2The Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are
connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected
to an appropriate power source that is on.
Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the Device, see the troubleshooting for
suggestions.
Use this screen to set up file sharing using the Device. To access this screen, click Network
Setting > USB Service > File Sharing.
Figure 94 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing
A
BC
Chapter 14 USB Service
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
216
Each field is described in the following table.
14.3 The Media Server Screen
The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the USB
storage device connected to your Device (without having to copy them to another computer). The
Device can function as a DLNA-compliant media server. The Device streams files to DLNA-compliant
media clients (like Windows Media Player). The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of
personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home
network.
The Device media server enables you to:
• Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the
Device.
• Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files.
Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares. No user
name and password or other form of security is used. The media server is enabled
by default with the video, photo, and music shares published.
To change your Device’s media server settings, click Network Setting > USB Service > Media
Server. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 95 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server
Table 69 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Sharing
Services Select Enable to activate file sharing through the Device.
Host Name Enter the host name on the share.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 14 USB Service
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 217
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
14.4 The Printer Server Screen
The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB
printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP/IP port on the computers
connected to your network.
Figure 96 Sharing a USB Printer
14.4.1 Before You Begin
To configure the print server you need the following:
• Your Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network. The
USB printer must be connected to your Device.
• A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer.
• The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can
create a TCP/IP port for printing via the network. Follow your printer manufacturers instructions
on how to install the printer software on your computer.
Note: Your printer’s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your
computer. Connect your printer to the Device instead.
Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device.
Table 70 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Media Server Select Enable to have the Device function as a DLNA-compliant media server.
Enable the media server to let (DLNA-compliant) media clients on your network play media
files located in the shares.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 14 USB Service
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
218
To access this screen, click Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server.
Figure 97 Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
Table 71 Network Setting > USB Service > Print Server
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Printer Server Select Enable to have the Device share a USB printer.
Printer Name Enter the name of the printer.
Make and
model Enter the manufacturer and model number of the printer.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 219
CHAPTER 15
Firewall
15.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Device’s security settings. Use the firewall
to protect your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to
it. By default the firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN.
The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant
Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2).
However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4).
Figure 98 Default Firewall Action
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the General screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the Device (Section 15.2
on page 221).
•Use the Service screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall
rules (Section 15.3 on page 221).
•Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section
15.4 on page 223).
•Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (.Section 15.5
on page 226).
WAN
LAN
3
4
1
2
A
Chapter 15 Firewall
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
220
15.1.2 What You Need to Know
SYN Attack
A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the
targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that
follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-
ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates
the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests,
making the system unavailable for legitimate users.
DoS
Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the
Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer
have access to network resources. The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and
thwart all known DoS attacks.
DDoS
A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby
causing denial of service for users of the targeted system.
LAND Attack
In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of
the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making
the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself.
Ping of Death
Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum
65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or
reboot.
SPI
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is
valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the
WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN.
Chapter 15 Firewall
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 221
15.2 The Firewall Screen
Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the Device. Firewall rules are grouped
based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.
Click Security > Firewall to display the General screen.
Figure 99 Security > Firewall > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
15.3 The Service Screen
You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Service screen. For a
comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number
Authority) website. See Appendix F on page 361 for some examples.
Table 72 Security > Firewall > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Firewall Select Enable to activate the firewall feature on the Device.
Easy Select Easy to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Medium Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions.
High Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 15 Firewall
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
222
Click Security > Firewall > Service to display the following screen.
Figure 100 Security > Firewall > Service
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
15.3.1 Add/Edit a Service
Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall’s ACL rule
configuration. Click Add new service entry or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the
Service screen to display the following screen.
Figure 101 Service: Add/Edit
Table 73 Security > Firewall > Service
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new
service entry Click this to add a new service.
Name This is the name of your customized service.
Description This is the description of your customized service.
Ports/Protocol
Number This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or range
of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number displays if the
service uses another IP protocol.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the entry.
Click the Delete icon to remove this entry.
Chapter 15 Firewall
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 223
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
15.4 The Access Control Screen
Click Security > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. This screen displays a
list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules.
Figure 102 Security > Firewall > Access Control
Table 74 Service: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Protocol Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port from
the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number.
Source/
Destination Port These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port.
Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your
customized service. If you select Any, the service is applied to all ports.
Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized
service.
Protocol
Number This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol.
Enter the protocol number of your customized port.
Add Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below.
Rule List
Protocol This is the IP port (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port.
Ports/Protocol
Number For TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or range that
defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number.
Modify Click the Delete icon to remove the rule.
Service Name Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for
your customized port.
Service
Description Enter a description for your customized port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 15 Firewall
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
224
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 75 Security > Firewall > Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
DoS Protection DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and
connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access
becomes unavailable.
Select the Enable check box to enable protection against DoS attacks.
Add new ACL
rule Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Name This displays the name of the rule.
Src IP This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank
source address is equivalent to Any.
Dst IP This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a
blank destination address is equivalent to Any.
Service This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic
to which this rule applies.
Action This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and
sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender
(REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT).
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one
when you take this action.
Click the Move To icon to change the order of the rule. Enter the number in the # field.
Chapter 15 Firewall
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 225
15.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule
Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control
screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 103 Access Control: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 76 Access Control: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces,
underscores, and dashes.
You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing
the ACL rule.
Order Select the order of the ACL rule.
Select Source
Device Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address,
enter the source IP address in the field below.
Source IP
Address Enter the source IP address.
Select
Destination
Device
Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP
Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below.
Destination IP
Address Enter the destination IP address.
Chapter 15 Firewall
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
226
15.5 The DoS Screen
DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and
connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access
becomes unavailable.
Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks. Click Security > Firewall > DoS
to display the following screen.
Figure 104 Security > Firewall > DoS
IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6.
Select Protocol Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down
list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security > Firewall > Service >
Add screen display in this list.
If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific Service.
Protocol This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol.
Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ICMPv6) that defines your customized
port from the drop-down list box.
Custom Source
Port This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol.
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source.
Custom
Destination Port This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol.
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination.
Policy Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP
destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of
(ACCEPT) packets that match this rule.
Direction Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies.
Enable Rate
Limit Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the
specified protocol.
Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is.
Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a
new schedule rule by click Add New Rule. This will bring you to the Security > Scheduler
Rules screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 76 Access Control: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 Firewall
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 227
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 Security > Firewall > DoS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
DoS Protection
Blocking Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks.
Deny Ping
Response Select Enable to block ping request packets.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 15 Firewall
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
228
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 229
CHAPTER 16
MAC Filter
16.1 Overview
You can configure the Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC
Filter screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. Every Ethernet device has a unique
MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six
pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC
addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
16.2 The MAC Filter Screen
Use this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the Device. Click Security > MAC Filter.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 105 Security > MAC Filter
Chapter 16 MAC Filter
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
230
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 78 Security > MAC Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC Address Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function.
Set This is the index number of the MAC address.
Allow Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied
access to the Device.
If you clear this, the MAC Address field for this set clears.
Host name Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the
Device.
MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the
Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format,
that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 231
CHAPTER 17
Parental Control
17.1 Overview
Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time
periods and days during which the Device performs parental control on a specific user.
17.2 The Parental Control Screen
Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules.
Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen.
Figure 106 Security > Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 79 Security > Parental Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Parental
Control Select Enable to activate parental control.
Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new parental control rule.
#This shows the index number of the rule.
Status This indicates whether the rule is active or not.
A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
PCP Name This shows the name of the rule.
Home Network
User (MAC) This shows the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this rule applies.
Chapter 17 Parental Control
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
232
17.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Rule
Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to
an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL
filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites.
Figure 107 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit
Internet Access
Schedule This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled.
Network
Service This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown.
Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 79 Security > Parental Control (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 Parental Control
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 233
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 80 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule.
Parental
Control Profile
Name
Enter a descriptive name for the rule.
Home Network
User Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you
select Custom, enter the LAN user’s MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all
LAN users.
Internet Access Schedule
Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform parental control.
Time Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access.
Network Service
Network
Service Setting If you select Block, the Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs
listed below.
If you select Allow, the Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below.
Add new
service Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the
Service Name, Protocol, and Name of the new rule.
#This shows the index number of the rule. Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it.
Service Name This shows the name of the rule.
Protocol:Port This shows the protocol and the port of the rule.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Blocked Site/
URL Keyword Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Device
blocks access. Click Delete to remove it.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 17 Parental Control
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
234
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 235
CHAPTER 18
Scheduler Rules
18.1 Overview
You can define time periods and days during which the Device performs scheduled rules of certain
features (such as Firewall Access Control, Parental Control) on a specific user in the Scheduler Rules
screen.
18.2 The Scheduler Rules Screen
Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules.
Click Security > Scheduler Rules to open the following screen.
Figure 108 Security > Scheduler Rules
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 81 Security > Scheduler Rules
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this to create a new rule.
#This is the index number of the entry.
Rule Name This shows the name of the rule.
Day This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled.
Time This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled.
Description This shows the description of this rule.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule.
Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule.
Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature.
Chapter 18 Scheduler Rules
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
236
18.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule
Click the Add button in the Scheduler Rules screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule
to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule for a specific
user on your network.
Figure 109 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 82 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Rule Name Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this
schedule.
Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform this scheduler rule.
Time if Day
Range Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which parental control will be
enforced.
Description Enter a description for this scheduler rule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 237
CHAPTER 19
Certificates
19.1 Overview
The Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based
on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key.
Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the Device's
CA-signed certificates (Section 19.4 on page 241).
•The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Device (Section 19.4
on page 241).
19.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Certification Authority
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government
certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone
can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the Device
to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send
the certification requests to a certification authority.
Chapter 19 Certificates
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
238
19.3 The Local Certificates Screen
Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the Device’s summary
list of certificates and certification requests.
Figure 110 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 83 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Private Key is
protected by a
password?
Select the checkbox and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the Device.
The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces).
Browse... Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification
authority from your computer to the Device.
Create Certificate
Request Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the Device generate a
certification request.
Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you
give each certificate a unique name.
Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN
(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company)
and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject
information.
Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification
authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or
company and country.
Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in
red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become
applicable.
Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and
includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has
already expired.
Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the
certificate (or certification request).
For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate.
Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot
delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
Chapter 19 Certificates
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 239
19.3.1 Create Certificate Request
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to
open the following screen. Use this screen to have the Device generate a certification request.
Figure 111 Create Certificate Request
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate
request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_Signed to import the
signed certificate into the Device. Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen.
Table 84 Create Certificate Request
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate.
Common Name Select Auto to have the Device configure this field automatically. Or select Customize to
enter it manually.
Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field
provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The
domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.
Organization
Name Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner
belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces.
State/Province
Name Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is
located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces.
Country/Region
Name Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 19 Certificates
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
240
Figure 112 Certificate Request Created
19.3.2 Load Signed Certificate
After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local
Certificates screen click the certificate request’s Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate
into the Device.
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import
it.
Figure 113 Load Signed Certificate
Chapter 19 Certificates
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 241
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
19.4 The Trusted CA Screen
Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a
summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Device to accept as
trusted. The Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as
being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these
certification authorities.
Figure 114 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 85 Load Signed Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name This is the name of the signed certificate.
Certificate Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the Device.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 86 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Import
Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification
authority that you trust to the Device.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common
Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and
Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification
Authority signed the certificate.
Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the
certificate (or certification request).
Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot
delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
Chapter 19 Certificates
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
242
19.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate
Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view
in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate.
Figure 115 Trusted CA: View
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 87 Trusted CA: View
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification
Authority signed the certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common
Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C).
Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM
uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you
can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management
computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Chapter 19 Certificates
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 243
19.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate
Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The
Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates.
Figure 116 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 88 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate File
Path Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to
find it.
Enable Trusted
CA for 802.1x
Authentication
If you select this checkbox, the trusted CA will be used for 802.1x authentication. The
selected trusted CA will be displayed in the Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x:
Edit screen.
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the Device.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 19 Certificates
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
244
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 245
CHAPTER 20
Log
20.1 Overview
The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the
Device log and then display the logs or have the Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail)
or to a syslog server.
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the System Log screen to see the system logs (Section 20.2 on page 246).
•Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select
(Section 20.3 on page 247).
20.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Alerts and Logs
An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks
(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System
Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log
screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Syslog Overview
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to
syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog
message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog
facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for
details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
Table 89 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE SEVERITY
0 Emergency: The system is unusable.
1 Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
2 Critical: The system condition is critical.
3 Error: There is an error condition on the system.
4 Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
Chapter 20 Log
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
246
20.2 The System Log Screen
Use the System Log screen to see the system logs. Click System Monitor > Log to open the
System Log screen.
Figure 117 System Monitor > Log > System Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
5 Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
6 Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
7 Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
Table 89 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE SEVERITY
Table 90 System Monitor > Log > System Log
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Level Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to
the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches
through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >
Logs Setting screen.
System Log
#This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Messages This field states the reason for the log.
Chapter 20 Log
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 247
20.3 The Security Log Screen
Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select.
Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen.
Figure 118 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 91 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Level Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to
the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches
through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >
Logs Setting screen.
#This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Messages This field states the reason for the log.
Chapter 20 Log
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
248
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 249
CHAPTER 21
Traffic Status
21.1 Overview
Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN and LAN
interfaces.
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 21.2 on page 249).
•Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 21.3 on page 251).
21.2 The WAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figure in this screen shows
the number of bytes received and sent on the Device.
Figure 119 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
Chapter 21 Traffic Status
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
250
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 92 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Connected
Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected.
Packets Sent
Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
more...hide
more Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them.
Disabled
Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected.
Packets Sent
Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Chapter 21 Traffic Status
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 251
21.3 The LAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. The figure in this
screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the Device.
Figure 120 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 93 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.
Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
more...hide
more Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them.
Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Sent (Packets)
Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Received (Packets)
Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Chapter 21 Traffic Status
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
252
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 253
CHAPTER 22
ARP Table
22.1 Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on
the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The
ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
22.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device,
the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN.
The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP
address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target
MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either
the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast
address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer
directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then
sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
22.2 ARP Table Screen
Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click System
Monitor > ARP Table.
Figure 121 System Monitor > ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 94 System Monitor > ARP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the ARP table entry number.
IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port.
Chapter 22 ARP Table
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
254
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address.
Device This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device type to go to its
configuration screen.
Table 94 System Monitor > ARP Table (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 255
CHAPTER 23
Routing Table
23.1 Overview
Routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward
a packet.
23.2 The Routing Table Screen
Click System Monitor > Routing Table to open the following screen.
Figure 122 System Monitor > Routing Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 95 System Monitor > Routing Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Destination This indicates the destination IP address of this route.
Gateway This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this route’s traffic.
Subnet Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route.
Flag This indicates the route status.
U-Up: The route is up.
!-Reject: The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail.
G-Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic.
H-Host: The target of the route is a host.
R-Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing.
D-Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect.
M-Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect.
Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for
transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower
the "cost".
Chapter 23 Routing Table
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
256
Service This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route.
Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded.
br0 indicates the LAN interface.
ptm0 indicates the WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode.
ppp0 indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE.
Table 95 System Monitor > Routing Table (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 257
CHAPTER 24
IGMP Status
24.1 Overview
Use the IGMP Status screens to look at IGMP group status and traffic statistics.
24.2 The IGMP Group Status Screen
Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the Device has joined and which ports
have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > IGMP Group Status.
Figure 123 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 96 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This field displays the name of an interface on the Device that belongs to an IGMP multicast
group.
Multicast Group This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs.
Filter Mode INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast
group’s traffic.
EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the
multicast group’s traffic but other IP addresses can.
Source List This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast
group’s traffic depending on the filter mode.
Chapter 24 IGMP Status
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
258
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 259
CHAPTER 25
xDSL Statistics
25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen
Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click System Monitor > xDSL Statistics to open
the following screen.
Figure 124 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics
Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
260
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 97 Status > xDSL Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select the time interval for refreshing statistics.
Line Select which DSL line’s statistics you want to display.
xDSL Training
Status This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection.
Mode This displays the ITU standard used for this connection.
Traffic Type This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. Inactive displays if
the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic.
Link Uptime This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was
started.
xDSL Port Details
Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service
provider.
Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service
provider.
Line Rate These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data.
Actual Net Data
Rate These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without
transport layer protocol headers and traffic.
Trellis Coding This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and
receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce
throughput but it makes the connection more stable.
SNR Margin This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A DMT sub-
carrier’s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power.
The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could
increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets.
Actual Delay This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in milliseconds) that
determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then
transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon)
is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the
data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed.
Transmit Power This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm).
Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider.
Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port.
Receive Power Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port. Downstream
is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider.
Actual INP Sudden spikes in the line’s level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors and
result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as
voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to allow for correction of
errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The number of DMT (Discrete Multi-
Tone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and
downstream traffic. A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability, but it
causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia
data.
Total Attenuation This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB). This
attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power
received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge,
quality, condition and length of the physical line).
Attainable Net
Data Rate These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and
receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic.
xDSL Counters
Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 261
Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service
provider.
Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service
provider.
FEC This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks.
CRC This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks.
ES This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least
one errored block or at least one defect.
SES This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing
30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of ES.
UAS This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds.
LOS This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds.
LOF This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds.
LOM This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds.
Table 97 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
262
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 263
CHAPTER 26
User Account
26.1 Overview
In the Users Account screen, you can change the password of the user account that you used to
log in the Device.
26.2 The User Account Screen
Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen.
Figure 125 Maintenance > User Account
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 98 Maintenance > User Account
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Name This field displays the name of the account that you used to log in the system.
Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this
field.
New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password,
the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use
the new password to access the Device.
Retype to
confirm Type the new password again for confirmation.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 26 User Account
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
264
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 265
CHAPTER 27
Remote Management
27.1 Overview
Remote Management allows you to manage your Device from a remote location through the
following interfaces:
•LAN
•WAN
•Trust Domain
Note: The Device is managed using the Web Configurator.
27.2 The Remote MGMT Screen
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) users can use which service(s) to manage
the Device.
Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT to open the following screen.
Figure 126 Maintenance > Remote MGMT
Chapter 27 Remote Management
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
266
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 99 Maintenance > Remote MGMT
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trust Domain
Status This field displays whether the Trust Domain is active or not.
IP Address Enter the Trust Domain IP address.
Services This is the service you may use to access the Device.
LAN/WLAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the Device from the LAN/WLAN.
WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the Device from the WAN.
Trust Domain Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the Device from the Trust Domain.
Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Certificate
HTTPS
Certificate Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the Device) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS
client. You must have certificates already configured in the Certificates screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 267
CHAPTER 28
TR-069 Client
28.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the Device’s TR-069 auto-configuration settings.
28.2 The TR-069 Client Screen
TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your Device, can be managed
over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote
Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup
Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS.
An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the Device, modify settings, perform firmware
upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the Device. You have to enable the device to be managed
by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password.
Click Maintenance > TR-069 Client to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure
your Device to be managed by an ACS.
Figure 127 Maintenance > TR-069 Client
Chapter 28 TR-069 Client
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
268
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 100 Maintenance > TR-069 Client
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Inform Select Enable for the Device to send periodic inform via TR-069 on the WAN. Otherwise,
select Disable.
Inform Interval Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the Device sends information to the auto-
configuration server.
ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server.
ACS User Name Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-configuration server.
ACS Password Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-configuration server.
WAN Interface
used by TR-069
client
Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes.
If you select Any_WAN, you should also select the pre-configured WAN connection(s).
Display SOAP
messages on
serial console
Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console.
Connection
Request
Authentication
Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS.
Connection
Request User
Name
Enter the connection request user name.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this user name is used to
authenticate the ACS.
Connection
Request
Password
Enter the connection request password.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this password is used to
authenticate the ACS.
Connection
Request URL This shows the connection request URL.
The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the Device.
Local certificate
used by TR-069
client
You can choose a local certificate used by TR-069 client. The local certificate should be
imported in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 269
CHAPTER 29
TR-064
29.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the Device’s TR-064 auto-configuration settings.
29.2 The TR-064 Screen
TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on
top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their
computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the
username and password.
Click Maintenance > TR-064 to open the following screen.
Figure 128 Maintenance > TR-064
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 101 Maintenance > TR-064
LABEL DESCRIPTION
State Select Enable to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 29 TR-064
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
270
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 271
CHAPTER 30
Time Settings
30.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password,
name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
30.2 The Time Screen
To change your Device’s time and date, click Maintenance > Time. The screen appears as shown.
Use this screen to configure the Device’s time based on your local time zone.
Figure 129 Maintenance > Time Setting
Chapter 30 Time Settings
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
272
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 102 Maintenance > Time Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current Date/Time
Current Time This field displays the time of your Device.
Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the time with the time server.
Current Date This field displays the date of your Device.
Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the date with the time server.
NTP Time Server
First ~ Fifth NTP
time server Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box.
Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII
characters in length) of your time server.
Select None if you don’t want to configure the time server.
Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time Zone
Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time
zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set
their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the
evening.
State Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start rule: Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight
Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific
week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States, set the day to Second, Sunday, the month to March
and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the
time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday
and the month to March. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time
zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's
time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight
Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific
week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each
time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So
in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the month to November
and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the
time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday,
and the month to October. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time
zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's
time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Chapter 30 Time Settings
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 273
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 102 Maintenance > Time Setting (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 30 Time Settings
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
274
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 275
CHAPTER 31
E-mail Notification
31.1 Overview
A mail server is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive, forward and
deliver e-mail messages.
To have the Device send reports, logs or notifications via e-mail, you must specify an e-mail server
and the e-mail addresses of the sender and receiver.
31.2 The Email Notification Screen
Click Maintenance > Email Notification to open the Email Notification screen. Use this screen
to view, remove and add mail server information on the Device.
Figure 130 Maintenance > Email Notification
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 103 Maintenance > Email Notification
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Email Click this button to create a new entry.
Mail Server
Address This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server.
Username This field displays the user name of the sender’s mail account.
Password This field displays the password of the sender’s mail account.
Email Address This field displays the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-
mail that the Device sends.
Remove Click this button to delete the selected entry(ies).
Chapter 31 E-mail Notification
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
276
31.2.1 Email Notification Edit
Click the Add button in the Email Notification screen. Use this screen to configure the required
information for sending e-mail via a mail server.
Figure 131 Email Notification > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 104 Email Notification > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mail Server
Address Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail address specified
in the Account Email Address field.
If this field is left blank, reports, logs or notifications will not be sent via e-mail.
Authentication
Username Enter the user name (up to 32 characters). This is usually the user name of a mail account
you specified in the Account Email Address field.
Authentication
Password Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Account Email
Address Enter the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail
notification that the Device sends.
If you activate SSL/TLS authentication, the e-mail address must be able to be authenticated
by the mail server as well.
Apply Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 277
CHAPTER 32
Logs Setting
32.1 Overview
You can configure where the Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the Device
records in the Logs Setting screen.
32.2 The Log Settings Screen
To change your Device’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs Setting. The screen appears as
shown.
Figure 132 Maintenance > Logs Setting
Chapter 32 Logs Setting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
278
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
32.2.1 Example E-mail Log
An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The
following is an example of a log sent by e-mail.
• You may edit the subject title.
• The date format here is Day-Month-Year.
• The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.
Table 105 Maintenance > Logs Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Syslog Setting
Syslog Logging The Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Select Enable to enable syslog logging.
Mode Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box.
If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local
File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog
server and save it in a local file, select Local File and Remote.
Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories
of logs.
UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server.
E-mail Log Settings
Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses
specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
System Log
Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail message that
the Device sends.
Security Log
Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail message that
the Device sends.
Send Log to The Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
the Device does not send logs via E-mail.
Send Alarm to Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack,
system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the
alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to
blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated.
Allowed
Capacity Before
Email
Set what percent of the Device’s log storage space can be filled before the Device sends a
log e-mail.
Clear log after
sending mail Select this to delete all the logs after the Device sends an E-mail of the logs.
Active Log and Alert
System Log Select the categories of system logs that you want to record.
Security Log Select the categories of security logs that you want to record.
Send
immediate alert Select log categories for which you want the Device to send E-mail alerts immediately.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 32 Logs Setting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 279
•"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent.
Figure 133 E-mail Log Example
Subject:
Firewall Alert From
Date:
Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42
From:
user@zyxel.com
To:
user@zyxel.com
1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |
2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |
3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward
| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
End of Firewall Log
Chapter 32 Logs Setting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
280
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 281
CHAPTER 33
Firmware Upgrade
33.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your Device. You can download new firmware
releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your device’s
performance.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your Device.
33.2 The Firmware Screen
Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the
system will reboot.
Do NOT turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 134 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 106 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current
Firmware
Version
This is the present Firmware version and the date created.
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it.
Browse... Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Chapter 33 Firmware Upgrade
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
282
After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Device again.
Figure 135 Firmware Uploading
The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 136 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Firmware Upgrade screen.
Figure 137 Error Message
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 283
CHAPTER 34
Configuration
34.1 Overview
The Configuration screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also
reset your device settings back to the factory default.
34.2 The Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.
Figure 138 Maintenance > Configuration
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the Device’s current configuration to a file on
your computer. Once your Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended
that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup
configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the Device’s current configuration to your computer.
Chapter 34 Configuration
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
284
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your
computer to your Device.
Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress.
After the Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again
to restart the Device.
The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 139 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your
computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See
Appendix A on page 299 for details on how to set up your computer’s IP address.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Configuration screen.
Figure 140 Configuration Upload Error
Table 107 Restore Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it.
Browse... Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click this to begin the upload process.
Chapter 34 Configuration
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 285
Reset to Factory Defaults
Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Device to
its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.
Figure 141 Reset Warning Message
Figure 142 Reset In Process Message
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device.
Refer to Section 1.6 on page 25 for more information on the RESET button.
34.3 The Reboot Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off. You may
need to do this if the Device hangs, for example.
Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the Device reboot. This does not affect the
Device's configuration.
Figure 143 Maintenance > Reboot
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 286
CHAPTER 35
Diagnostic
35.1 Overview
The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device.
The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by
independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts
subscriber’s network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE
802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network
administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the
path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs.
35.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route
packets take to a host (Section 35.3 on page 287).
•The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 35.5 on page 289).
•The OAM Ping Test screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and
Maintenance) packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 35.5 on page 289).
35.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
How CFM Works
A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports
on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send
Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices’
CCMs within an MA.
CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults.
• Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target
after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a
connectivity fault between them.
• Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where
the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault.
Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to
the line connectivity status report.
Chapter 35 Diagnostic
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 287
35.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic >
Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup to open the screen shown next.
Figure 144 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 108 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
URL or IP
Address Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in
order to test a connection.
Ping Click this to ping the IP address that you entered.
TraceRoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet
takes to the specified computer.
Nslookup Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter.
Chapter 35 Diagnostic
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
288
35.4 802.1ag
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > 8.2.1ag to open the following screen. Use this screen to
perform CFM actions.
Figure 145 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 109 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
LABEL DESCRIPTION
802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management
Maintenance
Domain (MD)
Level
Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA.
Destination
MAC Address Enter the target device’s MAC address to which the Device performs a CFM loopback test.
802.1Q VLAN
ID Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA.
VDSL Traffic
Type This shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated.
Loopback
Message (LBM) This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or
outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP.
Linktrace
Message (LTM) This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR).
Set MD Level Click this button to configure the MD (Maintenance Domain) level.
Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified
remote end point.
Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a
specified remote end point.
Chapter 35 Diagnostic
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 289
35.5 OAM Ping Test
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test to open the screen shown next. Use this
screen to perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a
PVC. The Device sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to
the Device. The test result then displays in the text box.
ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual
circuits is as follows:
Figure 146 Virtual Circuit Topology
Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and
wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual
circuit.
F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC)
level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different
predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC
connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in
the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types.
• segment F4 flows (VCI=3)
• end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4)
• segment F5 flows (PTI=100)
• end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101)
OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL
devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC
segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM
link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest
neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end
PVC.
Note: The DSLAM to which the Device is connected must also support ATM F4 and/or F5
to use this test.
• Virtual Channel (VC) Logical connections between ATM devices
• Virtual Path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels
• Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points
Chapter 35 Diagnostic
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
290
Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface.
Figure 147 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 110 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test.
F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test.
F4 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test.
F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test.
F5 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 291
CHAPTER 36
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
•Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
•Device Access and Login
•Internet Access
•Wireless Internet Access
•USB Device Connection
•UPnP
36.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1Make sure the Device is turned on.
2Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device.
3Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
4Turn the Device off and on.
5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 24.
2Check the hardware connections.
3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
4Turn the Device off and on.
Chapter 36 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
292
5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
36.2 Device Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the Device.
1The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1.
2If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the Device by
looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows
computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default
Gateway might be the IP address of the Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP
address in your Internet browser.
3If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
25.
I forgot the password.
1The default admin password is 1234.
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
25.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 8.2 on page 143), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the Device.
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section
1.5 on page 24.
3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled. See Appendix C on page 329.
4If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and
HTTPS (Maintenance > Remote MGMT).
Chapter 36 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 293
5Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Device with the default IP address.
See Section 1.6 on page 25.
6If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account
even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser.
• Try to access the Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Device,
check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not
respond to HTTP.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Device.
1Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1234. The field
is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device. Log
out of the Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
3Turn the Device off and on.
4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 36.1 on page
291.
I cannot Telnet to the Device.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload
new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
Chapter 36 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
294
36.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
1Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the
Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 24.
2Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Setting >
Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
3If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in
the Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same
as the settings in the Device.
4Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them.
5If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection.
1Make sure you have the DSL WAN port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack
on a splitter if you have one).
2Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband screen)
with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
3Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL
connection (Network Setting > Interface Group).
4If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in
the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection.
ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL
connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the Device), but my
Internet connection is not available anymore.
1Your session with the Device may have expired. Try logging into the Device again.
Chapter 36 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 295
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the
Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 24.
3Turn the Device off and on.
4If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
36.4 Wireless Internet Access
What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this
problem?
The following factors may cause interference:
• Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.
• Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.
• Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless
devices.
To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:
• Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.
• Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding
wireless electronics such as cordless phones.
• Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and
the wireless client.
• Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add
additional APs if necessary.
• Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the
wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open
that use the Internet.
What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?
An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a
wireless network must use the same SSID.
What wireless security modes does my Device support?
Wireless security is vital to your network. It protects communications between wireless stations,
access points and the wired network.
Chapter 36 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
296
The available security modes in your Device are as follows:
•WPA2-PSK: (recommended) This uses a pre-shared key with the WPA2 standard.
•WPA-PSK: This has the device use either WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depending on which security
mode the wireless client uses.
•WPA2: WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption,
authentication and key management than WPA. It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is
mostly used in business networks.
•WPA: Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. It requires the use
of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks.
•WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the
wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private.
36.5 USB Device Connection
The Device fails to detect my USB device.
1Disconnect the USB device.
2Reboot the Device.
3If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is
connected to an appropriate power source that is on.
4Re-connect your USB device to the Device.
36.6 UPnP
When using UPnP and the Device reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My
Network Places > Local Network.
1Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Device’s LAN port or from your computer.
2Re-connect the Ethernet cable.
The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen.
Restart your computer.
Chapter 36 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 297
I cannot open special applications such as white board, file transfer and video when I use the
MSN messenger.
1Wait more than three minutes.
2Restart the applications.
Chapter 36 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
298
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 299
APPENDIX A
Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed.
Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions
of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your
computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package.
TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and
later operating systems.
After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to
"communicate" with your network.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your
computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Device’s LAN port.
Windows 95/98/Me
Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network
window.
Figure 148 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
300
Installing Components
The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a
network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks.
If you need the adapter:
1In the Network window, click Add.
2Select Adapter and then click Add.
3Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK.
If you need TCP/IP:
1In the Network window, click Add.
2Select Protocol and then click Add.
3Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
4Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK.
If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
1Click Add.
2Select Client and then click Add.
3Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
4Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK.
5Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.
Configuring
1In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click
Properties
2Click the IP Address tab.
• If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 301
• If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into
the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields.
Figure 149 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address
3Click the DNS Configuration tab.
• If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS.
• If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields
below (you may not need to fill them all in).
Figure 150 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
302
4Click the Gateway tab.
• If you do not know your gateway’s IP address, remove previously installed gateways.
• If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add.
5Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window.
6Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted.
7Turn on your Device and restart your computer when prompted.
Verifying Settings
1Click Start and then Run.
2In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window.
3Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default
gateway.
Windows 2000/NT/XP
The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme.
1Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel.
Figure 151 Windows XP: Start Menu
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 303
2In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections
in Windows 2000/NT).
Figure 152 Windows XP: Control Panel
3Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Figure 153 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
304
4Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties.
Figure 154 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties
5The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 305
• Click Advanced.
Figure 155 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP
Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
•In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
•In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask,
and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default
gateways.
•In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To
manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic
metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
306
• Click OK when finished.
Figure 156 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
7In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP
address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server
addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 307
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order
them.
Figure 157 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
8Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
9Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows
2000/NT).
11 Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
1Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
2In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open
Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support
tab.
Windows Vista
This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
308
1Click the Start icon, Control Panel.
Figure 158 Windows Vista: Start Menu
2In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet.
Figure 159 Windows Vista: Control Panel
3Click Network and Sharing Center.
Figure 160 Windows Vista: Network And Internet
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 309
4Click Manage network connections.
Figure 161 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
5Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying
that it needs your permission to continue.
Figure 162 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
310
6Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties.
Figure 163 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties
7The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the General tab).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 311
• Click Advanced.
Figure 164 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
8 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP
Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
•In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
•In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask,
and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default
gateways.
•In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To
manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic
metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
312
• Click OK when finished.
Figure 165 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
9In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the General tab):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP
address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server
addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 313
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order
them.
Figure 166 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window.
11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
12 Close the Network Connections window.
13 Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
1Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
2In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open
Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support
tab.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
314
Macintosh OS 8/9
1Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control
Panel.
Figure 167 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 315
2Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list.
Figure 168 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP
3For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list.
4For statically assigned settings, do the following:
•From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box.
5Close the TCP/IP Control Panel.
6Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration.
7Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window.
Macintosh OS X
1Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window.
Figure 169 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu
2Click Network in the icon bar.
•Select Automatic from the Location list.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
316
•Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list.
• Click the TCP/IP tab.
3For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list.
Figure 170 Macintosh OS X: Network
4For statically assigned settings, do the following:
•From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box.
5Click Apply Now and close the window.
6Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 317
Linux
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0.
Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release
version.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE)
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE.
1Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click
Network.
Figure 171 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
318
2Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device
General screen displays as shown.
Figure 172 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General
• If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and
select dhcp from the drop down list.
• If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address,
Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields.
3Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen.
4If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration
screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.
Figure 173 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS
5Click the Devices tab.
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 319
6Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save
the changes in all screens.
Figure 174 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate
7After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network
Configuration screen.
Using Configuration Files
Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address.
1Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0
configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with
any plain text editor.
• If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure
shows an example.
Figure 175 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
• If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed
by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet
mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10
and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Figure 176 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=dhcp
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.1.10
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
320
2If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf
file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP
addresses are specified.
Figure 177 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf
3After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network
restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example.
Figure 178 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
Verifying Settings
Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties.
Figure 179 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
nameserver 172.23.5.1
nameserver 172.23.5.2
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart
Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]
Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]
Setting network parameters: [OK]
Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]
Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]
[root@localhost]# ifconfig
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44
inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb)
Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 321
APPENDIX B
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same
way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common
network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has
its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets
to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are
delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example,
192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary
number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in
decimal.
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
322
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are
the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
Figure 180 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according
to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are
part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term “subnet” is short for “sub-network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP
address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit
in the IP address is part of the host ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host
ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the
leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.
Table 111 Subnet Masks
1ST OCTET:
(192)
2ND
OCTET:
(168)
3RD
OCTET:
(1)
4TH OCTET
(2)
IP Address (Binary) 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000
Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001
Host ID 00000010
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 323
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1” value).
For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24
bits are zeroes.
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following
examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks.
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have
on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of
remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit
subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that
network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of
possible hosts in a network as follows:
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a
continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the
number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/”
followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128.
Table 112 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET 2ND
OCTET 3RD
OCTET 4TH OCTET
8-bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255.0.0.0
16-bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0
24-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0
29-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.248
Table 113 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS
8 bits 255.0.0.0 24 bits 224 – 2 16777214
16 bits 255.255.0.0 16 bits 216 – 2 65534
24 bits 255.255.255.0 8 bits 28 – 2 254
29 bits 255.255.255.24
83 bits 23 – 2 6
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
324
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example
a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the
company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum
of 28 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 181 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-
networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25
and 192.168.1.128 /25.
Table 114 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION LAST OCTET
(BINARY) LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0 /24 0000 0000 0
255.255.255.128 /25 1000 0000 128
255.255.255.192 /26 1100 0000 192
255.255.255.224 /27 1110 0000 224
255.255.255.240 /28 1111 0000 240
255.255.255.248 /29 1111 1000 248
255.255.255.252 /30 1111 1100 252
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 325
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-
networks, A and B.
Figure 182 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 – 2 or 126
possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself, all ones is the subnet’s
broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask
255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to
an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two
subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host ID
bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all
zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
Table 115 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal) 192.168.1. 0
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
326
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
Table 116 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 64
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Table 117 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 128
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
Table 118 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 192
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
Table 115 Subnet 1 (continued)
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
Table 119 Eight Subnets
SUBNET SUBNET
ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST
ADDRESS BROADCAST
ADDRESS
1 0 1 30 31
232 33 62 63
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 327
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number.
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number.
364 65 94 95
496 97 126 127
5128 129 158 159
6160 161 190 191
7192 193 222 223
8224 225 254 255
Table 119 Eight Subnets (continued)
SUBNET SUBNET
ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST
ADDRESS BROADCAST
ADDRESS
Table 120 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
1255.255.255.128 (/25) 2126
2255.255.255.192 (/26) 462
3255.255.255.224 (/27) 830
4255.255.255.240 (/28) 16 14
5255.255.255.248 (/29) 32 6
6255.255.255.252 (/30) 64 2
7255.255.255.254 (/31) 128 1
Table 121 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
1255.255.128.0 (/17) 232766
2255.255.192.0 (/18) 416382
3255.255.224.0 (/19) 88190
4255.255.240.0 (/20) 16 4094
5255.255.248.0 (/21) 32 2046
6255.255.252.0 (/22) 64 1022
7255.255.254.0 (/23) 128 510
8255.255.255.0 (/24) 256 254
9255.255.255.128 (/25) 512 126
10 255.255.255.192 (/26) 1024 62
11 255.255.255.224 (/27) 2048 30
12 255.255.255.240 (/28) 4096 14
13 255.255.255.248 (/29) 8192 6
14 255.255.255.252 (/30) 16384 2
15 255.255.255.254 (/31) 32768 1
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
328
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses
specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You
must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Device.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your Device that is easy to
remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using
that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute
the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change
the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the
guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address
Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 329
APPENDIX C
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java
Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer
versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow
pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
Disable Pop-up Blockers
1In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker.
Figure 183 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab.
1In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
330
2Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any
web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
Figure 184 Internet Options: Privacy
3Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.
1In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 331
2Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Figure 185 Internet Options: Privacy
3Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the
prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.167.1.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
332
4Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 186 Pop-up Blocker Settings
5Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
6Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts
are allowed.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 333
1In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 187 Internet Options: Security
2Click the Custom Level... button.
3Scroll down to Scripting.
4Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
334
6Click OK to close the window.
Figure 188 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
1From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
2Click the Custom Level... button.
3Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
4Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 335
5Click OK to close the window.
Figure 189 Security Settings - Java
JAVA (Sun)
1From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
2Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
336
3Click OK to close the window.
Figure 190 Java (Sun)
Mozilla Firefox
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary.
You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the
screen that appears.
Figure 191 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 337
Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen.
Figure 192 Mozilla Firefox Content Security
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
338
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 339
APPENDIX D
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of
computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within
range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an
ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example
of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 193 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a
wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless
client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
340
disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with
each other.
Figure 194 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access
point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection
between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only
provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the
immediate neighborhood.
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 341
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated
wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.
Figure 195 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data.
Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your
region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce
interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing
interference and degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should
be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For
example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to
select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not
within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are
within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
342
cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
Figure 196 RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the
channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of
data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest
size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is
invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station
that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for
permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other
stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms
with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and
the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the
RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be
fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes)
that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data
frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while
you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 343
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you
set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames
will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b
adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or
lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the
maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless
clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the Device are data encryption, wireless client
authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Device identity.
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on
your Device.
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Device and on all
wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
Table 122 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION
1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
2 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11 CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/48/
54 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Table 123 Wireless Security Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL SECURITY TYPE
Least
Secure
Most Secure
Unique SSID (Default)
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
344
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to
support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It
is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x
are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for
centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional
authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless
clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and
accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server
handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
•Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the
network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the
wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point
sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user accounting:
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 345
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret
key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the
shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from
unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and
LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE
802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP
to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a
RADIUS server perform authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that
supports IEEE 802.1x.
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain
the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used
to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server
sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client ‘proves’ that it knows the password by
encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in
plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get
the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the
authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an
authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication.
Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You
must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for
mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of
the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done
in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive
attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which
imposes a management overhead.
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
346
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-
side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending
username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client
authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then
use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the
clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5,
EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the
wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is
generated each time reauthentication is performed.
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless
security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while
dynamic WEP is enabled.
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic
keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public
deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a
comparison of the features of authentication types.
Table 124 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
EAP-MD5 EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP LEAP
Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Certificate – Client No Yes Optional Optional No
Certificate – Server No Yes Yes Yes No
Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate
Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate
Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 347
WPA and WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a
wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management
than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user
authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use
WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use
WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into
each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless
client will be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on
whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less
secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity
Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but
offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter
mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm
called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check
(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is
never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key
hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption
keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless
clients. This all happens in the background automatically.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets,
altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the
receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is
assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity
checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi
network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference
between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific
credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
348
password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent,
single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal
encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of
WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate
wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange
messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a
network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and
pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless
devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication
with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not
need to go with the authentication process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an
AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless
client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch
for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client.
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero
Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it.
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812),
and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server
looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.
1The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
2The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies
network access accordingly.
3A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS
server and the client.
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 349
4The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and
management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The
keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and
the wireless clients.
Figure 197 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
1First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must
consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and
symbols).
2The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password
matches.
3The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not
sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
4The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information
exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data
exchanged between them.
Figure 198 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
350
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each
authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on
how you configure these security features.
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to
the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by
capturing RF signals from the air.
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a)
is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna’s coverage
area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width.
Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately
Table 125 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL
ENCRYPTIO
N METHOD ENTER
MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X
Open None No Disable
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Disable
Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Disable
WPA TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
WPA2 TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA2-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 351
2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of
approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal
power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna
that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the
antenna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The
coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room
environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage
areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light
from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles
typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional
antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In
point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to
each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For
omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP
application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area.
Appendix D Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
352
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 353
APPENDIX E
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast
address format is as follows.
Table 126 Link-local Unicast Address Format
1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID
10 bits 54 bits 64 bits
Appendix E IPv6
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
354
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in
IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does
not have its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to
“127.0.0.1” in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses.
Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts
in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast
addresses.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned
to a multicast group.
Table 127 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local connected link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local site.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All DHCP severs on a local site.
Table 128 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Appendix E IPv6
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 355
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an
Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One
interface should have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-
byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and
fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC
address. See the following example.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which
the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with
exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration
from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP
information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an
identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary
addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The
DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client
sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Table 128 Reserved Multicast Address (continued)
MULTICAST ADDRESS
MAC 00 : 13 : 49 :12 : 34 :56
EUI-64 02:13 :49 :FF :FE :12 : 34 :56
Appendix E IPv6
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
356
the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any
available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's
discretion.
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-
known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent
to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string,
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the
interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the
ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Device uses the received IPv6 prefix (for
example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements
(RAs) regularly by multicast, the Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The
hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443.
ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify
ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors
encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track
neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:
• Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC
address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it
responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement
message.
T1
T2
Renew Rebind
Rebind
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
to S2
to S2
Appendix E IPv6
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 357
• Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.
• Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and
forward packets.
• Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement
from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.
IPv6 Cache
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router
list. The Device maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from
response messages. In IPv6, the Device configures a link-local address automatically, and then
sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be
resolved or verified, the Device also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Device
receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the
neighbor cache. When the Device uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and
receives a router advertisement message, it adds the router’s information to the neighbor cache,
prefix list and destination cache. The Device creates an entry in the default router list cache if the
router can be used as a default router.
When the Device needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the
next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Device uses the prefix list to
determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing
through a router. If the address is unlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the
Device determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP
address is known, the Device looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends
the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Device cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache
or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps
reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
Multicast Listener Discovery
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report
message for that address.
An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave
a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then
sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if
other devices connected to this port should remain in the group.
Appendix E IPv6
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
358
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the
ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the
ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check
your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available
for the interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment,
you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use
static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore
this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
1Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
2After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client
Install as service.
3Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.46
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.254
Appendix E IPv6
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 359
4Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
5Click Start and then OK.
6Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
1Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
2Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
3Click OK to save the change.
Appendix E IPv6
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
360
4Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
5Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
6Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global
address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IPv6 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 2001:b021:2d::1000
Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.100.61
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 361
APPENDIX F
Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers.
•Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
•Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service
uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP
protocol number, not the port number.
•Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.
•If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
•If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
•Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations
in which this service is used.
Appendix F Services
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
362
Table 129 Examples of Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
AIM TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some
servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
7648
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from
White Pines Software.
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that
matches web names (for instance
www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security
Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this
service.
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related
command that can be used to find out if a
user is logged on.
FTP TCP
TCP
20
21
File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable
fast transfer of files, including large files
that may not be possible by e-mail.
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used
in e-commerce.
ICMP User-Defined 1Internet Control Message Protocol is often
used for diagnostic purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 2Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used
when sending packets to a specific group
of hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is
used for key distribution and management.
IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is
used for e-mail.
IMAP4S TCP 993 This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that
runs over SSL.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat
program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger service
uses this protocol.
NetBIOS TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
137
138
139
445
The Network Basic Input/Output System is
used for communication between
computers in a LAN.
Appendix F Services
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 363
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides
transparent file sharing for network
environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the
delivery mechanism for the USENET
newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that
sends out ICMP echo requests to test
whether or not a remote host is reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client
computer get e-mail from a POP3 server
through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or
other).
POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that
runs over SSL.
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables
secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
enables secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real
time sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
ROADRUNNER TCP/UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly
for cable modems.
RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media control)
Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for
multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old
way of transferring files between
computers.
SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the
message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that
runs over SSL.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
Table 129 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix F Services
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
364
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface
to access data on many different types of
database systems, including mainframes,
midrange systems, UNIX systems and
network servers.
SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol
supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a
UNIX server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation
protocol common on the Internet and in
UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/
IP networks. Its primary function is to
allow users to log into remote host
systems.
VDOLIVE TCP
UDP
7000
user-
defined
A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port
number is specified in the application.
Table 129 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 365
APPENDIX G
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2011 by MitraStar Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by MitraStar Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
MitraStar does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or
software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent
rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein
without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operations.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be
determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
1Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Appendix G Legal Information
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
366
3Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
4Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
• IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1
through 11.
• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20
cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.
注意 !
依據 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用
者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室內使用。
減少電磁波影響，請妥適使用。
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and
Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
Ce produit est conçu pour les bandes de fréquences 2,4 GHz et/ou 5 GHz conformément à la
législation Européenne. En France métropolitaine, suivant les décisions n°03-908 et 03-909 de
l’ARCEP, la puissance d’émission ne devra pas dépasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre d’une
installation WiFi en extérieur pour les fréquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
MitraStar Limited Warranty
MitraStar warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in
materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the
Appendix G Legal Information
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 367
warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to
faulty workmanship and/or materials, MitraStar will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective
products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall
deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any
replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or
higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of MitraStar. This warranty shall not apply if the
product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to
abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of
merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. MitraStar shall in no event be held liable
for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact MitraStar's Service Center for your Return Material
Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that
the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with
an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of MitraStar) and the customer
will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by MitraStar to the
corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from country to country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at
www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Appendix G Legal Information
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide
368
Index
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 369
Index
A
ACL rule 225
ACS 267
activation
firewalls 221
media server 217
SIP ALG 196
SSID 118
adding a printer example 69
Address Resolution Protocol 253
administrator password 28
alternative subnet mask notation 324
antenna
directional 351
gain 350
omni-directional 351
AP (access point) 341
applications
Internet access 22
media server 216
activation 217
iTunes server 216
applications, NAT 201
ARP Table 253, 255
authentication 129, 130
RADIUS server 130
Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 267
B
backup
configuration 283
Basic Service Set, See BSS 339
Basic Service Set, see BSS
blinking LEDs 24
Broadband 85
broadcast 107
BSS 132, 339
example 132
C
CA 237, 345
Canonical Format Indicator See CFI
CCMs 286
certificate
factory default 238
Certificate Authority
See CA.
certificates 237
authentication 237
CA
creating 239
public key 237
replacing 238
storage space 238
Certification Authority 237
Certification Authority. see CA
certifications 365
notices 366
CFI 106
CFM 286
CCMs 286
link trace test 286
loopback test 286
MA 286
MD 286
MEP 286
MIP 286
channel 341
interference 341
channel, wireless LAN 128
client list 146
compatibility, WDS 123
configuration
backup 283
firewalls 221
reset 285
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide370
Index
restoring 284
static route 102, 165, 205
Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs
copyright 365
CoS 182
CoS technologies 170
creating certificates 239
CTS (Clear to Send) 342
CTS threshold 125, 129
D
data fragment threshold 125, 129
DDoS 220
default server address 195
Denials of Service, see DoS
DHCP 142, 160
Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 182
DiffServ 182
marking rule 183
digital IDs 237
disclaimer 365
DLNA 216
DMZ 195
DNS 142, 160
DNS server address assignment 107
Domain Name 201
Domain Name System, see DNS
Domain Name System. See DNS.
DoS 220
DS field 182
DS, dee differentiated services
DSCP 182
dynamic DNS 203
wildcard 204
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP
dynamic WEP key exchange 346
DYNDNS wildcard 204
E
EAP Authentication 345
ECHO 201
e-mail
log example 278
Encapsulation 103
MER 103
PPP over Ethernet 103
encapsulation 86
RFC 1483 103
encryption 131, 347
ESS 340
Extended Service Set IDentification 112, 119
Extended Service Set, See ESS 340
F
FCC interference statement 365
File Sharing 214
file sharing 23
filters
MAC address 119, 130
Finger 201
firewalls 219
add protocols 221
configuration 221
DDoS 220
DoS 220
LAND attack 220
Ping of Death 220
SYN attack 220
firmware 281
version 83
forwarding ports 188
fragmentation threshold 125, 129, 342
FTP 188, 201
G
General wireless LAN screen 110
Index
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 371
H
hidden node 341
HTTP 201
I
IANA 328
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
see IANA
IBSS 339
IEEE 802.11g 343
IEEE 802.1Q 106
IGA 199
IGMP 107
multicast group list 257
version 107
ILA 199
Independent Basic Service Set
See IBSS 339
initialization vector (IV) 347
Inside Global Address, see IGA
Inside Local Address, see ILA
interface group 207
Internet
wizard setup 35
Internet access 22
wizard setup 35
Internet Protocol version 6 87
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
Internet Service Provider, see ISP
IP address 142, 161
ping 287
private 161
WAN 86
IP Address Assignment 106
IP alias
NAT applications 201
IPv6 87, 353
addressing 87, 107, 353
EUI-64 355
global address 354
interface ID 355
link-local address 353
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 353
ping 353
prefix 87, 107, 353
prefix delegation 88
prefix length 87, 107, 353
unspecified address 354
ISP 86
iTunes server 216
L
LAN 141
and USB printer 217
client list 146
DHCP 142, 160
DNS 142, 160
IP address 142, 143, 161
MAC address 147
status 83
subnet mask 142, 143, 161
LAND attack 220
LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 269
LBR 286
limitations
wireless LAN 131
WPS 139
link trace 286
Link Trace Message, see LTM
Link Trace Response, see LTR
login 27
passwords 27, 28
logs 245, 249, 257, 277
Loop Back Response, see LBR
loopback 286
LTM 286
LTR 286
M
MA 286
MAC address 120, 147
filter 119, 130
MAC authentication 119
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide372
Index
Mac filter 229
Maintenance Association, see MA
Maintenance Domain, see MD
Maintenance End Point, see MEP
managing the device
good habits 21
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 104
MBSSID 132
MD 286
media server 216
activation 217
iTunes server 216
MEP 286
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 106
multicast 107
Multiple BSS, see MBSSID
multiplexing 104
LLC-based 104
VC-based 104
multiprotocol encapsulation 103
N
NAT 187, 189, 198, 199, 328
applications 201
IP alias 201
example 200
global 199
IGA 199
ILA 199
inside 199
local 199
outside 199
port forwarding 188
port number 201
services 201
SIP ALG 196
activation 196
NAT example 202
Network Address Translation
see NAT
Network Address Translation, see NAT
Network Map 81
network map 30
NNTP 201
P
Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 347, 349
passwords 27, 28
PBC 134
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 104
Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 183
PHB 183
PIN, WPS 134
example 136
Ping of Death 220
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 201
POP3 201
port forwarding 188
ports 24
PPP over Ethernet, see PPPoE
PPPoE 86, 103
Benefits 103
PPTP 201
preamble 126, 129
preamble mode 133
prefix delegation 88
Printer Server 217
printer sharing
and LAN 217
configuration 64
requirements 217
TCP/IP port 64
private IP address 161
product registration 367
protocol 86
PSK 347
push button 26
Push Button Configuration, see PBC
push button, WPS 134
Q
QoS 169, 182
marking 170
setup 169
tagging 170
versus CoS 170
Index
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 373
Quality of Service, see QoS
R
RADIUS 344
message types 344
messages 344
shared secret key 345
RADIUS server 130
registration
product 367
related documentation 3
remote management
TR-069 267
Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 267
reset 25, 285
restart 285
restoring configuration 284
RFC 1483 103
RFC 3164 245
router features 22
RPPCs 267
RTS (Request To Send) 342
threshold 341, 342
RTS threshold 125, 129
S
safety warnings 6
security
wireless LAN 129
Security Log 247
Security Parameter Index, see SPI
service access control 265
Service Set 112, 119
Services 201
setup
firewalls 221
static route 102, 165, 205
Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM
SIP ALG 196
activation 196
SMTP 201
SNMP 201
SNMP trap 201
SPI 220
srTCM 184
SSID 130
activation 118
MBSSID 132
static route 163, 275
configuration 102, 165, 205
example 163
static VLAN
status 81
firmware version 83
LAN 83
WAN 83
wireless LAN 83
status indicators 24
subnet 321
subnet mask 142, 161, 322
subnetting 324
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 104
SYN attack 220
syntax conventions 4
syslog
protocol 245
severity levels 245
system
firmware 281
version 83
passwords 27, 28
reset 25
status 81
LAN 83
WAN 83
wireless LAN 83
time 271
T
Tag Control Information See TCI
Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID
TCI
TCP/IP port 64
The 86
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide374
Index
thresholds
data fragment 125, 129
RTS/CTS 125, 129
time 271
TPID 106
TR-064 269
TR-069 267
ACS setup 267
authentication 268
traffic shaping 104
trTCM 185
Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM
U
unicast 107
Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP
upgrading firmware 281
UPnP 148
cautions 143
example 149
installation 149
NAT traversal 142
USB features 23
V
VID
Virtual Circuit (VC) 104
Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN
VLAN 106
Introduction 106
number of possible VIDs
priority frame
static
VLAN ID 106
VLAN Identifier See VID
VLAN tag 106
W
WAN
status 83
Wide Area Network, see WAN 85
warranty
note 367
WDS 123, 133
compatibility 123
example 133
web configurator 27
login 27
passwords 27, 28
WEP 131
WEP Encryption 114, 115
WEP encryption 113
WEP key 113
Wi-Fi Protected Access 347
wireless client WPA supplicants 348
Wireless Distribution System, see WDS
wireless LAN 109, 127
authentication 129, 130
BSS 132
example 132
channel 128
encryption 131
example 128
fragmentation threshold 125, 129
limitations 131
MAC address filter 119, 130
MBSSID 132
preamble 126, 129
RADIUS server 130
RTS/CTS threshold 125, 129
security 129
SSID 130
activation 118
status 83
WDS 123, 133
compatibility 123
example 133
WEP 131
WPA 131
WPA-PSK 131
WPS 133, 136
example 137
limitations 139
PIN 134
push button 26, 134
wireless security 343
Wireless tutorial 42
Index
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 375
wizard setup
Internet 35
WLAN
interference 341
security parameters 350
WPA 131, 347
key caching 348
pre-authentication 348
user authentication 348
vs WPA-PSK 347
wireless client supplicant 348
with RADIUS application example 348
WPA2 347
user authentication 348
vs WPA2-PSK 347
wireless client supplicant 348
with RADIUS application example 348
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 347
WPA2-PSK 347
application example 349
WPA-PSK 131, 347
application example 349
WPS 133, 136
example 137
limitations 139
PIN 134
example 136
push button 26, 134
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide376
Index
Index
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide 377
VMG1312-B10A User’s Guide378
Index